TX-P65VT30B - TV PANASONIC - Free user manual and instructions
Find the device manual for free TX-P65VT30B PANASONIC in PDF.
User questions about TX-P65VT30B PANASONIC
0 question about this device. Answer the ones you know or ask your own.
Ask a new question about this device
Download the instructions for your TV in PDF format for free! Find your manual TX-P65VT30B - PANASONIC and take your electronic device back in hand. On this page are published all the documents necessary for the use of your device. TX-P65VT30B by PANASONIC.
USER MANUAL TX-P65VT30B PANASONIC
Operating Instructions
Plasma Television

natural_image
Front view of a flat-screen computer monitor (no visible text or symbols)VIERA
Thank you for purchasing this Panasonic product.
Please read these instructions carefully before operating this product and retain them for future reference.
The images shown in this manual are for illustrative purposes only.
Features
3D technology - Step into the 3D World.
Viewing 3D images on the Full HD panel You can enjoy viewing 3D images on this TV by wearing the 3D Eyewear.
RealD 3D
This TV and 3D Eyewear use the 3D technology of RealD. RealD is one of the inventors in 3D technology.
freesat HD tuner built-in UK only
This TV has a built-in freesat HD tuner. freesat is a free digital TV service which broadcasts via satellite so you can receive TV, radio, interactive TV, and HD TV with crystal clear reception.
DVB-T tuner built-in
Receives DVB (Digital Video Broadcasting) digital terrestrial broadcasts.
DVB-T2 tuner built-in UK only
DVB-T2 is an advanced digital terrestrial system for more efficient transmission.
Available DVB-T2 broadcasts will be tuned automatically when you perform DVB Auto Setup.
GUIDE Plus+ (p. 24) UK only
This TV supports the TV Guide services sent from the GUIDE Plus+ system.
Sharp pictures and clear sound with HDMI connection (p. 117)
Enjoy high definition digital picture and high quality sound by using an HDMI cable.
Using USB devices
Enjoy recording and playback the digital TV programmes to the USB HDD. (p. 74, 87) Enjoy the photo, video and music in the USB Flash Memory on Media Player. (p. 79) Wireless LAN Adaptor for the network connection. (p. 6, 12) USB keyboard, gamepad, etc. are available. (p. 118)
Timer Programming (p. 26, 62)
Timer Programming enables you to use functions such as programme reminder and programme recording to the external recorder or formatted USB HDD / SD Card.
SDXC Card
This TV supports SDXC Card. SDXC is the latest standard of SD Card and a higher storage capacity card.
DLNA
DLNA is a standard that makes digital electronics easier and more convenient to use on a home network. (p. 98)
VIERA Connect - Enjoy great web entertainment (p. 18, 101)
VIERA Connect allows you to access some specific websites supported by Panasonic, and enjoy internet contents such as photos, videos, games, etc. from VIERA Connect home screen.
Link up and control the connected equipment with "Q-Link" and "VIERA Link" (p. 102)
Q-Link and VIERA Link provide easy recording and playback, creation of a home theatre without complicated settings, etc.
VIERA TOOLS - Display special feature icons for easy accessibility (p. 40)
Special features (such as VIERA Link and Media Player) can be accessed easily by using the VIERA TOOLS button.
Dolby Digital Plus / Dolby Pulse decoders
It is possible to decode Dolby Digital Plus / Dolby Pulse multi-channel audio tracks and output as Dolby Digital Bitstream (multi-channel sound signal) from DIGITAL AUDIO OUT / HDMI2 (ARC function) terminals.
CONEQ (p. 44)
CONEQ is a technology to transduce the sound from speakers. You can enjoy sophisticated sound true to the original one.
Owner ID (p. 68)
Owner ID is an anti-theft function. Entering the PIN number and owner's personal information will help the Police to determine the owner in the case of theft.
Supports Audio Description signal (p. 20, 45) UK only
Audio Description (when broadcast) adds an additional soundtrack to describe events on screen (narration) and aids understanding and enjoyment, particularly for visually-impaired viewers.
Digital Switchover for Terrestrial broadcasts UK only
Starting in late 2007 and ending in 2012, TV services in the UK will go completely digital, TV region by TV region. If you have any questions, please call Digital UK on 08456 50 50 50 or visit www.digitaluk.co.uk Digital Switchover will cover a period of several weeks. When it starts you will lose all Analogue TV channels and some Digital TV channels will be missing.
You will need to retune your TV each time this happens to recover your digital channels. Analogue channels are permanently turned off, it will not be possible to recover them.
• To retune your TV →[Auto Setup] in [DVB Tuning Menu]-DVB mode (p. 53)
Users of cable or satellite boxes should still retune the TV to continue to receive Freeview channels via their aerial. (Your Analogue channel for viewing Cable or Satellite services will change to a new position.)
- Due to the digital reception technologies involved, quality of the digital signals may be relatively low in some cases, despite good reception of analogue channels.
Do not display a still picture for a long time
This causes the image to remain on the plasma screen ("image retention"). This is not considered a malfunction and is not covered by the warranty.
Typical still images
• Channel number and other logos
• Image displayed in 4:3 mode
- Video game
- Computer image
To prevent image retention, contrast is lowered automatically after a few minutes if no signals are sent or no operations are performed. (p. 121)

Panasonic does not guarantee operation and performance of peripheral devices made by other manufacturers; and we disclaim any liability or damage arising from operation and/or performance from usage of such other maker's peripheral devices.
The recording and playback of content on this or any other device may require permission from the owner of the copyright or other such rights in that content. Panasonic has no authority to and does not grant you that permission and explicitly disclaims any right, ability or intention to obtain such permission on your behalf. It is your responsibility to ensure that your use of this or any other device complies with applicable copyright legislation in your country. Please refer to that legislation for more information on the relevant laws and regulations involved or contact the owner of the rights in the content you wish to record or playback.
This product is licensed under the AVC patent portfolio license for the personal and non-commercial use of a consumer to (i) encode video in compliance with the AVC Standard ("AVC Video") and/or (ii) decode AVC Video that was encoded by a consumer engaged in a personal and non-commercial activity and/or was obtained from a video provider licensed to provide AVC Video. No license is granted or shall be implied for any other use. Additional information may be obtained from MPEG LA, LLC. See http://www.mpegla.com.
ROVI CORPORATION AND/OR ITS RELATED AFFILIATES ARE NOT IN ANY WAY LIABLE FOR THE ACCURACY OF THE PROGRAM SCHEDULE INFORMATION PROVIDED BY THE GUIDE PLUS+ SYSTEM. IN NO EVENT SHALL ROVI CORPORATION AND/OR ITS RELATED AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNTS REPRESENTING LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF BUSINESS, OR INDIRECT, SPECIAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH THE PROVISION OR USE OF ANY INFORMATION, EQUIPMENT, OR SERVICES RELATING TO THE GUIDE PLUS+ SYSTEM. http://www.europe.guideplus.com/
Notice for DVB / Data broadcasting / IPTV functions
This TV is designed to meet the standards (as of August, 2010) of digital services.
• The compatibility with future services is not guaranteed.
- Check the latest information on the available services at the following website.
http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/tv/
Contents
Be Sure to Read
Safety Precautions 4
Quick Start Guide
Accessories / Options 6
Identifying Controls 9
Basic Connection 11
Auto Setup 13
Enjoy your TV!
Basic Features
Using "VIERA Connect" 18
Watching TV 19
Using TV Guide 23
Viewing Teletext 28
Watching External Inputs 31
Viewing 3D images 33
How to Use VIERA TOOLS 40
How to Use Menu Functions 41
Advanced Features
Retuning from Setup Menu....52 Tuning and Editing Channels ....54 Timer Programming ....62 Child Lock ....64 Input Labels ....66 Shipping Condition ....67 Owner ID ....68 Using Common Interface ....69 Updating the TV Software ....70 Multi Window ....71 Advanced Picture Settings ....72 USB HDD / SD Card Recording ....74 Using Media Player ....79 Using Network Services (DLNA / VIERA Connect / freesat)....91 Link Functions (Q-Link / VIERA Link)....102 External Equipment ....110
FAQs, etc.
Technical Information....113 FAQs....121 On screen messages....124 Maintenance....127 Glossary....127 Index....128 Licence....129 Specifications....130
Safety Precautions
Warning
■ Mains plug and lead
To help avoid risk of electrical shock, fire, damage or injury, please follow the warnings below:
• This TV is designed to operate on AC 220-240 V, 50 / 60 Hz.
- Insert the mains plug fully into the socket outlet.
- Ensure that the mains plug is easily accessible.
- Remove the mains plug when cleaning the TV.
- Do not touch the mains plug with a wet hand.

- Do not damage the mains lead.
- Do not place a heavy object on the lead.
• Do not place the lead near a high temperature object. - Do not pull on the lead. Hold onto the mains plug body when disconnecting the plug.






If you detect anything unusual, immediately switch off the mains supply switch and remove the mains plug.

text_image
AC 220-240 V 50 / 60 Hz- Do not move the TV with the lead plugged into a socket outlet.
- Do not twist the lead, bend it excessively or stretch it.
- Do not use a damaged mains plug or socket outlet.
- Ensure the TV does not crush the mains lead.
- Ensure the earth pin on the mains plug is securely connected to prevent electrical shock.
- An apparatus with CLASS I construction shall be connected to a mains socket outlet with a protective earthing connection.
IMPORTANT: THE MOULDED MAINS PLUG
FOR YOUR SAFETY, PLEASE READ THE FOLLOWING TEXT CAREFULLY.
This TV is supplied with a moulded three pin mains plug for your safety and convenience. A 10 amp fuse is fitted in this mains plug. Shall the fuse need to be replaced, please ensure that the replacement fuse has a rating of 10 amps and that it is approved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362.
Check for the ASTA mark or the BSI mark on the body of the fuse.
If the mains plug contains a removable fuse cover, you must ensure that it is refitted when the fuse is replaced.
If you lose the fuse cover the mains plug must not be used until a replacement cover is obtained. A replacement fuse cover may be purchased from your local dealer.
Do not cut off the mains plug.
Do not use any other type of mains lead except the one supplied with this TV.
The supplied mains lead and moulded plug are designed to be used with this TV to avoid interference and for your safety.
If the socket outlet in your home is not suitable, get it changed by a qualified electrician.
If the plug or mains lead becomes damaged, purchase a replacement from an authorized dealer.
WARNING: – THIS TV MUST BE EARTHED.
How to replace the fuse.
Open the fuse compartment with a screwdriver and replace the fuse.

natural_image
Illustration of a plug with a screwdriver inserted, showing a downward arrow (no text or symbols)Warning
Take care
To help avoid risk of electrical shock, fire, damage or injury, please follow the warnings below :
- Do not remove covers and never modify the TV yourself as live parts are accessible when they are removed. There are no user serviceable parts inside.
- Do not expose the TV to rain or excessive moisture. This TV must not be exposed to dripping or splashing water and objects filled with liquid, such as vases, must not be placed on top of or above the TV.
- Do not expose the TV to direct sunlight and other sources of heat. To prevent fire never place any type of candle or naked flame on top or near the TV.
- Do not place the TV on sloped or unstable surfaces, and ensure that the TV does not hang over the edge of the base.
- Do not insert foreign objects into the TV through the air vents.
- Do not use an unapproved pedestal / mounting equipment. Be sure to ask your local Panasonic dealer to perform the setup or installation of approved wall-hanging brackets.
- Do not apply strong force or impact to the display panel.

text_image
re is inside. No No NoTo prevent the spread of fire, keep candles or other open flames away from this product at all times

■ Small object
This product contains possibly dangerous parts that can be breathed in or swallowed by young children accidentally.
- Keep the dangerous parts out of reach of young children.
- Do not allow children to handle SD Card. As with any small object, the SD Card could be swallowed by young children. Please remove SD Card immediately after use and store out of reach of young children.

Caution
Ventilation
Allow sufficient space around the TV in order to help prevent excessive heat, which could lead to early failure of some electronic components.
- Ventilation should not be impeded by covering the ventilation openings with items such as newspapers, tablecloths and curtains.


- Whether you are using the pedestal or not, always ensure the vents in the bottom of the TV are not blocked and there is sufficient space to enable adequate ventilation.
■ Moving the TV
Before moving the TV, disconnect all cables.
- The TV is heavy. Move the TV with at least two people. Support as shown to avoid injury by the TV tipping or falling.
- Transport only in upright position. Transporting the TV with its display panel facing upward or downward may cause damage to the internal circuitry.
Minimum distance

text_image
10 10 10 7(cm)

natural_image
Illustration of two workers installing or adjusting a monitor, with a magnified inset showing hands performing maintenance (no text or symbols)■ When not in use for a long time
This TV will still consume some power even in the Off mode, as long as the mains plug is still connected to a live socket outlet.
- Remove the mains plug from the wall socket when the TV is not in use for a prolonged period of time.
■ Excessive volume
Do not expose your ears to excessive volume from the headphones. Irreversible damage can be caused.


Accessories / Options
Standard accessories
Remote Control
• N2QAYB000593

Batteries for the Remote Control (2)
• R6 → (p. 7)

Pedestal (p. 7)
TX-P55VT30B :
- TBL5ZX0059
• TXFBL5Z0023
TX-P65VT30B :
•TBL5ZX0171
• TXFBL5Z0033 (2)
• TXFBL5Z0035

natural_image
Isometric view of a mechanical bracket mounted on a flat base plate (no text or symbols)
natural_image
Isometric diagram of a mechanical assembly with two vertical supports mounted on a base plate (no text or symbols)Wireless LAN Adaptor and exclusive stand
• N5HBZ0000055
K2KYYYY00132
→(p. 12, 92)

3D Eyewear set (2)
N5ZZ00000223
→ (p. 34)

Clamper
- TMME289
→ (p. 11)

Ferrite core (2)
(Large size)
• J0KG00000014
→ (p. 12, 111)

Ferrite core
(Small size)
J0KG00000011
→ (p. 112)

Use the Ferrite cores to comply with the EMC standard.
Operating Instructions Product Registration Leaflet
Terminal adaptors
Satellite adaptor
• K1TYYYY00158
→ (p. 11, 110)

RF adaptor
•K1TYYYY00159
→ (p. 11, 12, 110)

SCART adaptor
K1HY20YY0008
→ (p. 11, 12, 110)

COMPONENT adaptor
• K2KYYYY00137
→ (p. 110)

Composite adaptor
K2KYYYY00136
→ (p. 110, 111)

Audio adaptor
K2KYYYY00138
→ (p. 111)

Optical digital audio adaptor
K7CXGYC00001
→ (p. 111)

Optional accessories
Please contact your nearest Panasonic dealer to purchase the recommended optional accessories. For additional details, please refer to the manual of the optional accessories.
3D Eyewear set
(Battery type) (Rechargeable type)
- TY-EW3D10E

- TY-EW3D2LE
- TY-EW3D2ME
-
TY-EW3D2SE
-
If you need 3D Eyewears additionally, please purchase this optional accessory.
- For more information : http://panasonic.net/avc/viera/3d/eu.html
Communication Camera
• TY-CC10W

Caution
• This camera can be used on VIERA Connect (p. 18, 101).
- Please also read the manual of the camera.
- Depending on the area, this optional accessory may not be available.
For details, consult your local Panasonic dealer.
Wall-hanging bracket
• TY-WK5P1RW (TX-P55VT30B)

- Tilting angle for this TV: 0 (vertical) to 15 degrees
a : 500 mm
b : 300 mm
• TY-WK6P1RW (TX-P65VT30B)

natural_image
Technical line drawing of a mechanical frame or bracket (no text or symbols)- Tilting angle for this TV: 0 (vertical) to 10 degrees
a : 684 mm
b:300mm

text_image
Rear of the TV Depth of screw : minimum 10 mm, maximum 16 mm Diameter : M8 Screw for fixing the TV onto the wall-hanging bracket (not supplied with the TV) (View from the side)Holes for wall-hanging bracket installation
Warning
- Using other wall-hanging brackets, or installing a wall-hanging bracket by yourself have the risk of personal injury and product damage. In order to maintain the unit's performance and safety, be absolutely sure to ask your dealer or a licensed contractor to secure the wall-hanging brackets. Any damage caused by installing without a qualified installer will void your warranty.
- Carefully read the instructions accompanying optional accessories, and be absolutely sure to take steps to prevent the TV from falling off.
- Handle the TV carefully during installation since subjecting it to impact or other forces may cause product damage which will void your warranty.
• Take care when fixing wall brackets to the wall. Always ensure that there are no electrical cables or pipes in the wall before hanging bracket. - To prevent fall and injury, remove the TV from its fixed wall position when it is no longer in use for an extended period of time.
Installing / removing remote's batteries
1

text_image
HookPull open
2

text_image
Close Note the correctNote the correct polarity (+ or -)
Caution
- Incorrect installation may cause battery leakage and corrosion, resulting in damage to the remote control.
- Do not mix old and new batteries.
- Do not mix different battery types (such as alkaline and manganese batteries).
- Do not use rechargeable (Ni-Cd) batteries.
- Do not burn or break up batteries.
Batteries must not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire, etc. - Do not disassemble or modify the remote control.
Attaching / removing the pedestal
To help avoid risk of damage or injury by the TV tipping or falling, please follow the warnings and cautions below :
Warning
- Do not disassemble or modify the pedestal.
Caution
- Do not use any pedestal other than the one provided with this TV.
- Do not use the pedestal if it becomes warped or physically damaged. If this occurs, contact your nearest Panasonic dealer immediately.
- During setup, make sure that all screws are securely tightened.
- Ensure that the TV does not suffer any impact during installation of the pedestal.
- Ensure that children do not climb onto the pedestal.
• Install or remove the TV from the pedestal with at least two people.
TX-P55VT30B
A Assembly screw (8)
• THEL090N

M5 × 25
B Pole (2)
L : TBL5ZA3107
R:TBL5ZA3108

© Base
- TBL5ZX0059

TX-P65VT30B
D Assembly screw (6)
• THEL093J

M5 × 30
E Assembly screw (4)
• XYN6+F25FJK

M6 × 25
F Pole (2)
- TBL5ZA3125

G Base
- TBL5ZX0171

H Allen wrench
- TKKX5123

1 Assembling the pedestal
Use the assembly screws A / D to fasten the poles B / F to the base C / G securely.
- Make sure that the screws are securely tightened.
- Forcing the assembly screws the wrong way will strip the threads.
(TX-P55VT30B)
- "L" or "R" mark is stamped on the front of the pole.

text_image
A B-L C Front B-R(TX-P65VT30B)
- Use the allen wrench to tighten the screws.

text_image
Front F D H F G2 Securing the TV
Use the assembly screwsA / E to fasten securely.
- Tighten the four assembly screws loosely at first, then tighten them firmly to fix securely.
- Carry out the work on a horizontal and level surface.

text_image
Arrow mark Hole for pedestal installation A/E C/G(View from the bottom)
Removing the pedestal from the TV
Be sure to remove the pedestal in the following way when using the wall-hanging bracket or repacking the TV.
1 Remove the assembly screws A / E from the TV.
2 Pull out the pedestal from the TV.
3 Remove the assembly screws A / D from the pole.
Identifying Controls
Remote Control

text_image
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 INPUT TV AV MENU ASPECT GUIDE DIRECTVREC LIGHT LINK TOOLS i EXIT 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 DV/DVCR TV Panasonic TV1 Standby On / Off switch
• Switches TV On or Off standby
2 3D button (p. 38)
• Switches to the viewing mode between 2D and 3D
3 [Main Menu] → (p. 41)
- Press to access Picture, Sound, Timer and Setup Menus
4 Aspect → (p. 22)
• Changes aspect ratio
5 Light
- Lights the buttons (numeric, sound mute, last view, volume, channel) for about 5 seconds
6 [VIERA Link Menu]
→ (p. 106)
7 Information (p. 20)
• Displays channel and programme information
8 OK
- Confirms selections and choices
- Press after selecting channel positions to quickly change channel
• Displays the Channel List
9 [Option Menu] → (p. 21)
- Easy optional setting for viewing, sound, etc.
10 Teletext (p. 28)
• Switches to teletext mode
11 Subtitles (p. 22)
- Displays subtitles
12 Numeric buttons
• Changes channel and teletext pages
- Sets characters
- When in Standby mode, switches TV On (Press for about 1 second)
13 Sound Mute
• Switches sound mute On or Off
14 Volume Up / Down
15 Input mode selection
• TV - switches freesat / DVB / Analogue / Other Sat. / Satellite mode
→ (p. 19)
• AV - switches to AV input mode from Input Selection list
→ (p. 31)
16 Direct TV Recording
→ (p. 104, 106)
• Records programme immediately in DVD Recorder / VCR with Q-Link or VIERA Link connection
17 TV Guide → (p. 23)
18 [VIERA Connect]
→ (p. 18, 101)
• Displays VIERA Connect home screen
19 VIERA TOOLS
→ (p. 40)
• Displays some special feature icons and accesses easily
20 Exit
- Returns to the normal viewing screen
21 Cursor buttons
• Makes selections and adjustments
22 Return
- Returns to the previous menu / page
23 Coloured buttons (red-green-yellow-blue)
• Used for the selection, navigation and operation of various functions
24 Hold
- Freeze / unfreeze picture → (p. 21)
- Holds the current teletext page (teletext mode) → (p. 29)
25 Index →(p. 30)
- Returns to the teletext index page (teletext mode)
26 Last view → (p. 20)
• Switches to previously viewed channel or input mode
27 Channel Up / Down
28 Connected equipment operations
→ (p. 32, 78, 80, 98, 108)
TV

text_image
Common Interface 1 2 3 USB port (HDD) HDMI HDMI1 HDMI2 (ARC) HDMI3 HDMI4 12 F 5 6 7 + - TV + - AV 0/1 9 101 CI slot (p. 69)
2 SD Card slot → (p. 74, 79)
3 USB 3 port → (p. 74, 112)
4 HDMI1 - 4 terminal → (p. 112)
5 Function select
• [Volume] / [Contrast] / [Brightness] / [Colour] / [Sharpness] / [Tint] (NTSC signal) / [Bass]* / [Treble]* / [Balance] / [Auto Setup] (p. 52, 53)
* [Music] or [Speech] mode in the Sound Menu
6 Channel Up / Down, Value change (when using the F button), Switching the TV On (press either button for about 1 second when in Standby mode)
7 Changes the input mode
8 Mains power On / Off switch
- Use to switch the mains power. If you turned the TV Off during Standby mode by the remote control last time, the TV will be in Standby mode when you turn the TV On with Mains power On / Off switch.
9 Remote control signal receiver
- Do not place any objects between the TV remote control signal receiver and remote control.
10 C.A.T.S. (Contrast Automatic Tracking
11 8 System) sensor
- Senses brightness to adjust picture quality when [C.A.T.S.] in the Picture Menu is set to [On] (p. 42)
11 Power and Timer LED
- Red : Standby
Green : On
Orange : Timer Programming On
Orange (flash) :
Recording of Timer Programming, Direct TV Recording or One Touch Recording in progress
Red with orange flash :
Standby with Timer Programming On, Direct TV Recording or One Touch Recording
- The LED blinks when the TV receives a command from the remote control.
12 Infrared transmitter for 3D Eyewear
- Do not place any objects between the transmitter and 3D Eyewear.
Using the On Screen Displays - Operation guide
Many features available on this TV can be accessed via the On Screen Display menu.
Operation guide
Operation guide will help you to operate by using the remote control.
Example : [Owner ID]

text_image
Owner ID Please enter new PIN PIN * * * * EXIT 0-9 PIN entryOperation guide
How to use remote control

Open the main menu

Move the cursor / select the menu item / select from a range of options

Move the cursor / adjust levels / select from a range of options

Access the menu / store settings after adjustments have been made or options have been set

Return to the previous menu

Exit the menu system and return to the normal viewing screen
Auto power standby function
The TV will automatically go to Standby mode in the following conditions :
- no signal is received and no operation is performed for 30 minutes in Analogue TV mode
• [Off Timer] is active in the Timer Menu (p. 21) - no operation is performed for the period selected in [Auto Standby] (p. 45)
- This function does not affect the recording of Timer Programming, Direct TV Recording and One Touch Recording.
Basic Connection
External equipment and cables shown are not supplied with this TV.
Please ensure that the unit is disconnected from the mains socket before attaching or disconnecting any leads.
There are some restrictions on placement for viewing 3D images. For details →(p. 33, 37)
Example 1 Connecting dish or aerial
TV only
To ensure your satellite dish is correctly installed, please consult your local dealer.
• Also please consult the received satellite broadcasting companies for details.
- The freesat channel uses Astra 2 at 28.2^ East, and Eurobird 1 at 28.5^ East satellites. To ensure your satellite dish is correctly installed please consult your freesat registered dealer. UK only

text_image
Rear of the TV AC 220-240 V 50 / 60 Hz Mains lead For digital satellite broadcasts Satellite cable Satellite adaptor (supplied) Aerial input terminal RF adaptor (supplied) Satellite dish Terrestrial aerial RF cable For digital terrestrial and analogue broadcasts■ Clamper (Standard accessory / Attached with the mains lead)

text_image
Attach the clamper Bundle the cables Insert the clamper in a hole hole hooks Set the tip in the hooks To remove from the TV : Snaps Keep pushing both side snaps To loosen : Knob Keep pushing the knob- Do not bundle the Satellite cable, RF cable and mains lead together (could cause distorted image).
• Fix cables with clampers as necessary. - When using the optional accessory, follow the option's assembly manual to fix cables.
Example 2 Connecting DVD Recorder / VCR and Player
TV, DVD Recorder / VCR and Player

flowchart
graph TD
A["Rear of the TV"] --> B["HDMI"]
B --> C["Fully wired HDMI compliant cable"]
C --> D["HDMI"]
D --> E["Player / 3D-compatible player"]
E --> F["Fully wired SCART cable"]
F --> G["AV"]
G --> H["DVD Recorder or VCR"]
I["Aerial input terminal"] --> J["RF adaptor (supplied)"]
K["Terrestrial aerial"] --> L["RF cable"]
M["Aerial input terminal"] --> N["RF cable"]
O["AC 220-240 V 50 / 60 Hz"] --> P["Mains lead"]
Q["RF cable"] --> R["RF OUT"]
Q --> S["RF IN"]
Example 3 Connecting DVD Recorder / VCR and Cable TV Box
TV, DVD Recorder / VCR and Cable
Rear of the TV

flowchart
graph TD
A["AC 220-240 V\n50 / 60 Hz"] --> B["Aerial input terminal\nTerrestrial aerial"]
B --> C["RF adaptor (supplied)"]
C --> D["SCART adaptor (supplied)"]
D --> E["Fully wired HDMI compliant cable"]
E --> F["HDMI\nRecorder/AV"]
F --> G["Cable TV Box"]
G --> H["Cable"]
H --> I["DVD Recorder or VCR"]
I --> J["RF OUT"]
I --> K["RF IN"]
I --> L["RF cable"]
M["Mains lead"] --> N["RF cable"]
O["Aerial input terminal"] --> P["Service Port"]
P --> Q["SCART adaptor"]
Q --> R["Fully wired SCART cable"]
R --> S["AV 1"]
R --> T["AV 2"]
S --> U["Cable TV Box"]
T --> V["Cable"]
■ Connecting to the network environment (Network connections)
To enable the network service functions (VIERA Connect, etc.), you need to connect the TV to a broadband network environment.
- If you do not have any broadband network services, please consult your retailer for assistance.
- Connect with LAN cable (Wired connection) or Wireless LAN Adaptor (Wireless connection).
- Setup of the network connection will start after the tuning (when first using the TV) (p. 14, 15)
Rear of the TV

text_image
Wireless LAN Adaptor and exclusive stand "Standard accessories" (p. 6) • Insert the Wireless LAN Adaptor to the stand straightly and completely. • Connect to the USB 1 or 2 port. Internet environment Access pointWired connection

flowchart
graph LR
A["LAN cable"] -->|Less than 10 cm| B["Internet environment"]
A -->|Less than 10 cm| C["Network environment"]
style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
Ferrite core - Large size (supplied)
Installing the Ferrite core

text_image
① Pull back the tabs (in two places) ② Wind the cable twice ③ Press the cable through and close- For more information of the network connections (p. 92)
Note
• To watch 3D contents →(p. 33)
- Connect to the TV's AV1 for a DVD Recorder / VCR supporting Q-Link (p. 104).
- For HDMI-compatible equipment, possible to connect to HDMI terminals (HDMI1 / HDMI2 / HDMI3 / HDMI4) by using HDMI cable (p. 110).
• Q-Link and VIERA Link connection (p. 102, 103)
- Please also read the manual of the equipment being connected.
- Keep the TV away from electronic equipment (video equipment, etc.) or equipment with an infrared sensor. Otherwise, distortion of image / sound may occur or operation of other equipment may be interfered.
Auto Setup
Search and store TV channels automatically.
• These steps are not necessary if the setup has been completed by your local dealer.
- Please complete connections (p. 11, 12) and settings (if necessary) of the connected equipment before starting Auto Setup. For details of settings for the connected equipment, read the appropriate manual.

natural_image
Illustration of a flat-screen monitor with a cable or cable connector at one end (no text or symbols)1
Plug the TV into mains socket and switch On

• Takes a few seconds to be displayed.
- If the red LED shows on the TV, press the Standby On / Off switch on the remote control for at least 1 second to turn the TV On.

text_image
Panasonic TV EXIT i OK BACK/ RETURN 1 2 abc 3 def 4 ghi 5 jkl 6 mno 7 pqrs 8 tuv 9 wxyz 0 e2
Select your country
Country Selection
United Kingdom
Example : Example :

text_image
freesat Auto Setup Searching Signal Quality 0 10 Signal Strength 0 10 TV Channels Found 8 Radio Channels Found 2 Data Channels Found 1 Channels found, creating channel list. Auto Setup - DVB and Analogue DVB Scan CH 21:33 Analogue Scan CH 21:33 This will take about 6 minutes. CH Channel Name Type Quality 62 CBBC Channel Free TV 10 62 BBC Radio Wales Free TV 10 62 E4 Free TV 10 62 10Cartoon Nwk Free TV 29 Analogue - 33 -BBC1 Analogue Free TV: 8 Pay TV: 0 Radio: 0 Data: 0 Analogue: 2 SearchingAuto Setup will start to search for TV channels and store them.
• Actual number of channels may differ due to channel duplication.

① select
② set
Ireland
Free Channels
All Channels
Search Mode

① select
② start
Satellite Auto Setup

Satellite Auto Setup

text_image
Satellite Progress Astra1 0% 20% This will take up to 30 minutes. No. Channel Name Type 6 | ETV 7 | BBC TES 2 8 | BBC TES 3 9 | 10 | 10CBBC Channel 11 | CBebles Free TV: 11 Pay TV: 0 Radioc: 0 SearchingAuto Setup - DVB and Analogue

text_image
DVB Scan: CH 528 Analogue Scan: CH 1 ■ 99 H: 21 41 This will take about 6 minutes. CH Channel Name Type Quality 62 CBBC Channel Free TV 10 62 BBC Radio Wales Free TV 10 62 F4 Free TV 10 62 10 Cartoon Nwk Free TV - CH29 Analogue - CH33 Analogue -BBC1 Free TV: 8 Pay TV: 0 Radio: 0 Analog: 2 Searching
text_image
Sending Preset Data Please wait! 0% 100% Remote control unavailableIf Q-Link or similar technology (p. 104) compatible recorder with analogue tuner is connected, analogue channel setting is automatically downloaded to the recorder. (Digital channel setting is not downloaded.)
- If downloading has failed, you can download later through the Setup Menu.
→ "Q-Link Download" (p. 46)
3
Enter your postcode UK only

text_image
Enter Postcode for local channels including space Postcode A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9- Your postcode is required to receive local services and sort the channel order. Please ensure to include a space when entering your postcode. - If you skip this step, the default postcode (central London) will be set.
■ How to enter the postcode
Set characters

Exit to go to next step

- You can set characters by using numeric buttons. → "Characters table for numeric buttons" (p. 117)
4
Setup the network connection
Setup the network connection to enable the network service functions such as VIERA Connect, etc. (p. 18, 101).
• To setup the wireless connection, use the Wireless LAN Adaptor (supplied). (p. 17)
Please note that this TV does not support wireless public access points.
- Ensure the network connections (p. 12) and network environment are completed before starting setup.
Select the network type

text_image
Network Setup Select Wired or Wireless Wired Wireless Set later ETHERNET[Wired] “Wired connection” (p. 12) [Wireless] “Wireless connection” (p. 12)

text_image
① select ② access • To setup later on or skip this step → Select [Set later] or EXIT[Wired]
1. Select [Auto]
Acquire IP Address
Auto

Connection Test
Check network cable connection.
Check acquired IP address
Check for devices using same IP address.
Check gateway connection
Check server connection for VIERA Connect.

① select
② access
2. Go to the next step 5

(Press twice)
Automatically setup is done and the test of the network connection starts.
- To set manually, select [Manual] and set each item. For details (p. 94)

: succeeded
The test is successful and the TV is connected to the network.
: failed
Check the settings and connections. And then select [Retry].
[Wireless]
Select the connection type

text_image
Connection Type Please select network connection type. Search for access point WPS(Push button)
[Search for access point]
Access points found automatically are listed.
1. Select your desired access point

text_image
Available Access Points No. Wireless type Encrypt Reception 1 Access Point A 11n(2.4GHz) 2 Access Point B 11n(5GHz) 3 Access Point C 11n(5GHz) ... ... ... ... ...
- To search access points again (yellow)
-0 : Encrypted access point
• For the information of the highlighted access point

• To set manually (p. 97) (red)
2. Access the encryption key input mode
Encryption Key Setting
Connection will be made with the following settings:- SSID : Access Point A
Authentication type : WPA-PSK Encryption type : TKIP
Please input the encryption key.
Encryption key

- If the selected access point is not encrypted, the confirmation screen will be displayed. It is recommended to select the encrypted access point.
3. Enter the encryption key of the access point

text_image
Access Point Settings Encryption key A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 / 8 9 ! . # a b c d e f g h , k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z ( ) + - . *Set characters

- You can set characters by using numeric buttons.
"Characters table for numeric buttons" (p. 117)

Store
BACK/RETURN

4. Select [Yes]
Access Point Settings
Encryption key is set to:- XXXXXXXXX
Select 'Yes' to confirm. Select 'No' to change.
Yes
No

① select
② set
• To re-enter the encryption key, select [No].
- If the connection has failed, check the encryption key, settings and positions of your access point. And then, follow the on screen instructions.
5. After the access point setting is finished, perform the connection test


Connection Test
Check access point connection.
Check acquired IP address.
Check for devices using same IP address.
Check gateway connection.
Check server connection for VIERA Connect.

: succeeded
The test is successful and the TV is connected to the network.

: failed
Check the settings and connections. And then select [Retry].
- To set manually, select [Manual] and set each item. For details (p. 94)
6. Go to the next step 5

(Press twice)
[WPS(Push button)]
- Press the WPS button on the access point until the light flashes
- Connect the Wireless LAN Adaptor and the access point
WPS(Push button)
1) Please press the 'WPS' button on the access point until its light flashes.
2) When the light is flashing select 'Connect' on TV.
If you are unsure, please check the instruction manual of the access point.
Connect

- Ensure that your access point supports WPS for this setup.
• WPS : Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ - If the connection has failed, check the settings and positions of your access point. And then, follow the on screen instructions.
3. After the access point setting is finished, perform the connection test


Connection Test
Check access point connection.
Check acquired IP address.
☑ Check for devices using same IP address.
Check gateway connection.
Check server connection for VIERA Connect.
4. Go to the next step 5

(Press twice)

: succeeded
The test is successful and the TV is connected to the network.

: failed
Check the settings and connections. And then select [Retry].
• To set manually, select [Manual] and set each item. For details (p. 94)
Input Owner ID

text_image
Owner ID Please enter new PIN PIN * * * *Please enter your own choice of PIN number, name, etc. to help the police to crack crime.
• Make a note of the PIN number in case you forget it. The PIN number cannot be reset.
- You can input or change the Owner ID later. →[Owner ID] (p. 68)
• To skip this step
EXIT

- This step will be skipped in the Auto Setup after [Shipping Condition] (p. 67) is performed.
■ How to input Owner ID
1 Enter the PIN number (4 digits)

text_image
Owner ID Please enter new PIN PIN * * * *
- Enter the PIN number twice at first setting.
2 Select the item (NAME / HOUSE NO / POSTCODE)

text_image
Owner ID-Data Entry PIN * * * * NAME HOUSE NO POSTCODE
3 Enter your name, house number and postcode
Set characters

text_image
User input NAME A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 I : # a b c d e f g h - j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z ( ) + - - * - 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60

Return to select other items
BACK/RETURN

• You can set characters by using numeric buttons.
"Characters table for numeric buttons" (p. 117)
- Select the next item and repeat the operations.
4 Exit to go to next step
EXIT

6 Select [Home]
Select [Home] viewing environment (highlight [Home] in yellow) to use in your home environment.
Please select your viewing environment.
Home
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [Home] - 1](/content/2026/05/796352/images/f392800844300ad74dfcdb9343af99ee3f0be192ec643b270be9c3474e873922.jpg)
① select
② set
■ [Shop] viewing environment (for shop display only)
[Shop] viewing environment is the demonstration mode to explain main features of this TV.
Select [Home] viewing environment to use in your home environment.
- You can return to viewing environment selection screen at the stage of Shop confirmation screen and Automatic Demo Off / On selection screen.
1 Return to viewing environment selection screen

text_image
Shop You have selected shop mode Automatic Demo Off On
2 Select [Home]
Please select your viewing environment.
Home
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [Home] - 1](/content/2026/05/796352/images/977caad07f173d53eb8034d6e18b6e608224652e1d49385a309e8f15f792e90d.jpg)
① select
② set
To change viewing environment later on, you will need to initialise all settings by accessing Shipping Condition. ▶[Shipping Condition] (p. 67)
Auto Setup is now complete and your TV is ready for viewing.
If tuning has failed, check the connection of the Satellite cable, RF cable, and then, follow the on screen instructions.
- To check channel list at-a-glance → "Using TV Guide" (p. 23)
• To edit or hide (skip) channels → "Tuning and Editing Channels" (p. 54 - 61)
• To retune all channels →[Auto Setup] (p. 52, 53, 60) - If you wish to tune in other satellite channels
[Auto Setup] in [Other Sat. / Satellite Tuning Menu] (p. 60)
• To initialise all settings → [Shipping Condition] (p. 67)
Caution
Be aware of the following limits before using the supplied Wireless LAN Adaptor.
- To use the Wireless LAN Adaptor, an access point needs to be obtained.
- Do not use the Wireless LAN Adaptor to connect to any wireless network (SSID) for which you do not have usage rights. Such networks may be listed as a result of searches. However, using them may be regarded as illegal access.
*SSID is a name for identifying a particular wireless network for transmission.
- Do not subject the Wireless LAN Adaptor to high temperatures, direct sunlight or moisture.
- Do not bend, or subject the Wireless LAN Adaptor to strong impacts.
- Do not disassemble or alter the Wireless LAN Adaptor in any way.
- Do not attempt to install the Wireless LAN Adaptor in any incompatible device.
- Do not remove the Wireless LAN Adaptor from the TV's USB port during operations.
• Data transmitted and received over radio waves may be intercepted and monitored.
- To avoid malfunctions caused by radio wave interface, keep the TV away from the devices such as other wireless LAN devices, microwaves and the devices that use 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz signals when using the Wireless LAN Adaptor.
- When noises occur due to the static electricity, etc., the TV might stop operating for the protection of the devices. In this case, turn the TV Off with Mains power On / Off switch, then turn it On again.
- Depending on the area, this Wireless LAN Adaptor may not be available.
- Additional information for Wireless LAN Adaptor and access point may be on the following web site. http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/tv/
If you connect the Wireless LAN Adaptor later on, the confirmation screen will be displayed for the setup.
• To setup the wireless connection→(p. 95 - 97)
Wireless LAN adaptor connection
Wireless LAN adaptor connected, do you want to
set it up?
No - Exit
Current network type : Wireless
Yes
No
Wireless LAN Adaptor



Declaration of Conformity (DoC)
Hereby, “Panasonic Corporation” declares that this product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
Customers can download a copy of the original DoC to our R&TTE products from our DoC server: http://www.doc.panasonic.de
Contact in the EU: Panasonic Services Europe, a Division of Panasonic Marketing Europe GmbH, Panasonic Testing Centre, Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Germany
This product is intended to be used in Ireland and United Kingdom.
This product is intended for general consumer. (Category 3)
The WLAN feature of this product shall exclusively be used inside buildings.
This product on purpose to connect to access point of 2.4 GHz or 5 GHz WLAN.
Using "VIERA Connect"
VIERA Connect is a gateway to the internet services unique to Panasonic and has expanded VIERA CAST features greatly.
VIERA Connect allows you to access some specific websites supported by Panasonic, and enjoy internet contents such as photos, videos, games, etc. from VIERA Connect home screen.
- This TV has no full browser function and all features of websites may not be available.

text_image
EXIT OK BACK/ RETURN 1 2 abc 3 def 4 ghi 5 jkl 6 mno 7 pqrs 8 tuv 9 wxyz 0To exit from
VIERA Connect
EXIT

• To set the VIERA Connect instruction banner display off
→ [VIERA Connect Banner] (p. 47)
1
Turn power on


text_image
Enjoy selected internet content with VIEFA Connect. Simply press the OK / INTERNET button- Press for about 1 second
- Mains power On / Off switch should be On. (p. 10)
Every time you turn on the TV, VIERA Connect introduction banner appears. The banner is subject to change.
2
Access VIERA Connect

Example :

text_image
Welcome to VIERA Connect™ VIERA Connect™ is a product version that is not being used in this tool. The product version is designed to be a standard product version, but it is not suitable for any specific product or the other products. This is recommended to be available for all products. It is also recommended to be available for all products. It is also recommended to be available for all products. It is also recommended to be available for all products.- The button marking varies depending on the remote control supplied with your TV.
- While the VIERA Connect introduction banner is displayed for a few seconds after power on, pressing the OK button will also start VIERA Connect.
- Depending on the usage conditions, it may take a while to read all the data.
- Messages might be displayed before VIERA Connect home screen. Please read these instructions carefully and follow the on screen instructions.
Example : VIERA Connect home screen

text_image
Dutler Main from the leading sports, from the following: 24% Hearing this More Back VIEFA Discount• To go to the next level
→ [MORE]
• To back to the previous level
→ [BACK]
■ How to operate VIERA Connect (current as of January, 2011)
• To move the cursor / select the item

- When the key words are displayed on colour bar
(red) (green) (yellow) (blue)
• To access

- When options with numbers are displayed

• To return to the previous screen
BACK/RETURN

• To return to VIERA Connect home screen

• Video communication (ex. Skype™) requires an exclusive Communication Camera TY-CC10W.
→ "Optional accessories" (p. 6)
For details, read the manual of the Communication Camera.
- You can connect a keyboard and a gamepad via USB port for character input and playing games in VIERA Connect.
You can also operate the TV with a keyboard or a gamepad other than VIERA Connect features.
For more information → "USB connection" (p. 118)
Note
- If you cannot access VIERA Connect, check the network connections (p. 12) and settings (p. 14, 15).
- For more information of VIERA Connect →(p. 101)
Watching TV

text_image
INPUT TV MENU ASPECT GUIDE EXIT OPTION 1 2 abc 3 def 4 ghi 5 jkl 6 mno 7 pqrs 8 tuv 9 wxyz 0 + - Volume1
Turn power on

- Press for about 1 second
- Mains power On / Off switch should be On. (p. 10)
■ VIERA Connect introduction banner appears
You can access to VIERA Connect and enjoy the various contents. ➔ (p. 18)

- To remove this banner, leave for about 5 seconds or press any buttons (except the buttons to access VIERA Connect).
• To set this banner display off
→ [VIERA Connect Banner] (p. 47)
2
Select the mode (freesat, DVB, Analogue, Other Sat. or Satellite)
TV
- The selectable modes vary depending on the selected country and stored channels (p. 13).

text_image
TV Selection freesat DVB Analogue Other Sat. SatelliteUK only
Displayed if
[Other Satellite Auto Setup] (p. 60)
is completed. UK only
Ireland only

①select
②access

text_image
1 BBC ONE WALES Comparison Series 20.00 - 20.59 How wide 20.15 All DVB Channels Select favorites- Also possible to select the mode pressing the TV button repeatedly on the remote control or side panel of the TV (p.10).
Information banner →(p. 20)
3
Select a channel

up
down
or

freesat channel position numbers run in the ranges 100 - 999 and 0100 - 0999. UK only
• To select a three or four-digit channel position number, e.g. 0246







DVB and Other Sat. / Satellite channel position numbers run from 1 onwards.
Analogue channel position numbers run in the ranges 0 - 99.
• To select a two or three-digit channel position number, e.g. 399





Note
• To watch pay-TV
→ "Using Common Interface" (p. 69)
■ Select a channel using Information banner (p. 20)
It is possible to confirm the channel name and programme information by using the Information banner before changing channels.
1 Display Information banner if it is not displayed

2 While the banner is displayed, select the channel

① select channel
② watch
■ Select a channel using TV Guide (p. 23)
It is possible to confirm the channel and programme information by using the TV Guide (EPG) before changing channels.
1 Display TV Guide
GUIDE

2 Select a current
programme or channel

① select
② access
3 Select [View] (DVB mode)

text_image
Eastlender 19:30- 20:00 View Timer Programming
① select
② watch
Other useful functions
Display Information banner
Display Information banner

• Also appears when changing a channel

text_image
Example : DVB HDTV Coronation Street 20:00 - 20:55 Now 20:35 All DVB Channels Select favouritesInfo Mute S4L6A1gEXT Multi Audio 45
1 Channel position and name
2 Channel type ([Radio], [Data], [HDTV], etc.) / Encrypted channel (F/ TV mode (mess, 3))
3 Programme
4 Current time
5 Programme Start / Finish time (except Analogue)
Channel number, etc. (Analogue)
6 Progress time indicator of the selected programme (except Analogue)
7 [All DVB Channels], [freesat Channel List], [All Other Sat. Channels], [All Satellite Channels] or [Favourites1-4] (p. 57)
- To switch (DVB or Other Sat. / Satellite) (blue)
Features available / Message meanings
[Mute]
Sound mute On
[Bad signal]
Poor TV signal quality
[Also in HD]
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - [Also in HD] - 1](/content/2026/05/796352/images/18f6cee5d711b2361a79b35917d54fd46facdeef6465e1700dd56afcb562e604.jpg)
Same programme available as HD broadcast
• To display the extra information for details
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - [Also in HD] - 2](/content/2026/05/796352/images/fdd29e84ac537f2db9e2bc9a64d4163376b47f77a04b10495d77d1cd157d8d68.jpg)
[AD] UK only
Audio Description service available
- This function can aid visually-impaired viewers by adding an additional audio track to describe events on screen.
- For settings →(p. 45)
[STLL]
Subtitle service available
[TEXT]
Teletext service available
[Multi Audio]
Multiple audio available
[Stereo], [Mono], [NICAM]
Audio mode
1 - 90
Off Timer remaining time
- For settings →(p. 21)
• To confirm another tuned channel name

• To watch the channel listed in the banner

• Information on the next programme (except Analogue)

• To hide EXIT

• Extra information (except Analogue)
i (Press again to hide the banner)
• To set display timeout
→ [Banner Display Timeout] (p. 47)
- [AD], [STTL], [TEXT], [Multi Audio] indications are displayed as available on particular programmes, but may not be available for all individual programmes being broadcast. Display the extra information to confirm availability of these functions.
Example :

text_image
1 BBC ONE WALES Coronation Street 20:00 - 20:55 Now [AD] AD 20:35 All DVB Channels Select favouritesLast view
Switch to previously viewed channel or input mode easily

- Press again to return to the present view.
Note
- Switching channel is not available while the recording of Timer Programming, Direct TV Recording or One Touch Recording is in progress.
- Watching less than 10 seconds is not regarded as the previously viewed channel or input mode.
Hold
Freeze / unfreeze picture

Display the selectable settings for the current status
Check or change the current status instantly
OPTION

• To change

① select
② access


select / change
store
[Multi Audio / AD] UK only
(freesat mode)
Allows you to select between alternative language or Audio Description for sound tracks (if available)
- Set Audio Description [Auto] in the Sound Menu (p. 45) to select the audio description sound track. In freesat mode, Audio Description cannot be controlled separately from the audio description sound track.
- This setting is not memorized and it will return to the default setting once you exit the current programme.
[Audio Description]
UK only
(DVB mode)
Set to [Auto] if the programme has Audio Description service, then you will hear an additional audio track to describe events on screen
• To adjust the volume for Audio Description
→ [Audio Description Menu] (p. 45)
[Multi Audio]
(DVB, Other Sat. UK or Satellite Ireland mode)
Allows you to select between alternative language for sound tracks (if available)
- This setting is not memorized and it will return to the default setting once you exit the current programme.
[Monaural Audio]
(except Analogue mode)
Allows you to select stereo / monaural (if available)
- This setting is not memorized and it will return to the default setting once you exit the current programme.
[Sub Channel]
(Other Sat. UK or Satellite Ireland mode)
Allows you to select the multifeed programme - sub channel (if available)
[Subtitle Language]
(except Analogue mode)
Allows you to select the language in which subtitles should appear (if available)
- This setting is not memorized and it will return to the default setting once you exit the current programme.
[Teletext Character Set]
Ireland only
Sets the teletext language font
→ [Setup Menu] (p. 46)
[Teletext Language]
Ireland only
(DVB or Satellite mode)
Allows you to select between alternative language for teletext (if available)
[NICAM]
(Analogue mode)
Switches NICAM sound (if available)
→ [Sound Menu] (p. 44)
[Volume Correction]
Adjusts volume of individual channel or input mode
[Safely remove USB]
Takes this operation to remove the connected USB device safely from the TV
Off Timer
Turn the TV off automatically after a fixed period (Off / 15 / 30 / 45 / 60 / 75 / 90 minutes)
1 Display the menu 2 Select [Timer]
MENU


text_image
VISTA Main Menu Picture Sound Timer Setup
3 Select [Off Timer] and set the time
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [Off Timer] and set the time - 1](/content/2026/05/796352/images/d8fb75dfe828c617f22f86f7732bffa0077f34dd995500aeabba7664f31f6f00.jpg)
text_image
Timer Programming Off Timer Auto Standby Off 15 minutes 30 minutes 45 minutes 60 minutes 75 minutes 90 minutes![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [Off Timer] and set the time - 2](/content/2026/05/796352/images/60a5964f8096fda69c6b90583a37b71e1af1af8f30ae04ec5d9498263beeaae4.jpg)
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [Off Timer] and set the time - 3](/content/2026/05/796352/images/a6ae7d4f15ffcde900041bfd5af1bf8780c7f3d965537fc6a381476d8c2f908a.jpg)
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [Off Timer] and set the time - 4](/content/2026/05/796352/images/03f3fdb81110b0e39dc63e8e713cf4a59f019136a69be5c770798421d491e030.jpg)
③ select the time
④ store
• To cancel → Set to [Off] or turn the TV off.
• To display the remaining time → "Display Information banner" (p. 20)
- When the remaining time is within 3 minutes, the remaining time will flash on the screen.
Aspect
Change the aspect ratio (image size)

Enjoy viewing the image at its optimum size and aspect.
Programmes usually contain an “Aspect Control Signal” (Widescreen signal, etc.), and the TV will choose the aspect ratio automatically according to the “Aspect Control Signal” (p. 113).
If you would like to change the aspect ratio manually
1 Display Aspect Selection list


text_image
Select Selection Width 16.5 14.5 12 Zoom1 200x2 200x3 Select Change EXIT RETURNAspect Selection list
2 While the list is displayed, select the mode

- You can also change the mode only using the ASPECT button.

[Auto]

The best ratio is chosen and the image expanded to fill the screen.
For details (p. 113)
[16:9] [Zoom1]

Directly displays the image at 16:9 without distortion (anamorphic).

Displays a 16:9 letterbox or 4:3 image without distortion.
[14:9] [Zoom2]

Displays the image at the standard 14:9 without distortion.

Displays a 16:9 letterbox (anamorphic) image full-screen without distortion.
[4:3] [Zoom3]

Displays the image at the standard 4:3 without distortion.

Displays a 2.35:1 letterbox (anamorphic) image full-screen without distortion. At 16:9, displays the image at its maximum (with slight enlargement).
Note
- Aspect is fixed to [16:9] when [Viewing Mode] is set to [Game] in the Picture Menu.
- Aspect cannot be changed in teletext service and 3D mode (except for [2D 3D] mode in [3D Mode Selection] (p. 38)).
- Aspect mode can be memorized separately for SD (Standard definition) and HD (High definition) signals.
Display subtitles
- Subtitles may not be displayed properly in 3D images.
■ freesat, DVB or Other Sat. / Satellite mode
Display / hide subtitles (if available)

• To change the language for DVB (if available)
→ [Preferred Subtitles] (p. 46)
■ Analogue mode
Display subtitles Hide subtitles

EXIT

Note
- This is the same as switching to Analogue teletext service and selecting "P888" (subtitle service). (p. 30)
- You cannot change the channel when this function is active.
Using TV Guide
TV Guide–Electronic Programme Guide (EPG) provides an on screen listing of the programmes currently broadcast and the forthcoming broadcasts over the next seven days (depending on the broadcasters).
- When this TV is turned on for the first time, or the TV is switched off for more than a week, it may take some time before TV Guide is completely shown.
(freesat) UK only

text_image
INPUT TV GUIDE i EXIT OK OPTION BACK/ RETURN To return to TV EXIT or GUIDESelect freesat
→ (p. 19)
TV
2 Display the Channel Genre selection list
GUIDE
3
Select the genre and view TV Guide
Example :

text_image
Channel Genre Selection All Channels Entertainment News & Sport Movies Lifestyle Music Children Special Interest Radio Shopping Gaming & Dating Interactive Regional Favourites

text_image
Example : 5 6 1 Wed 27 Oct 2010 Season All Channels 1 BBC ONE 20:00 - 20:30 DIY SOS : We open in the Batteriesys Also in Time: 19:30 20:00 20:30 21:30 21:30 BBC ONE:OT Eastamer DIY SOS The Bill Red Cap Drama 102 BBC 2W Hot Wars Holiday Program 103 BBC NEWS Emmerdal Coronation Street The Bill Cinema 104 BBC 10 O'clock News BBC Pepsi Char. Good bye 105 BBC THREE CoastSpring watchPanorama 106 BBC FOUR NewsPop Idol In Sportsbody 107 BBC Radio NewsPop Idol In Sportsbody Select channel 0 - 19 Enter Channel Page up View / Timer Prog EXIT Info Page down Select programme OUT RETURN RETURN -24 hours +24 hours Search Channel Centre1 Current date and time
2 TV Guide time
3 Channel position and name
4 TV Guide date
5 Some programmes may also be broadcast in HD
- You can select HD or SD broadcast before viewing or setting Timer Programming.
6 Programme
- There might be some programmes displayed as greyed-out in TV Guide. These are the Off-Air programmes (non-running programmes).
■ To change the layout of TV Guide → [TV Guide View] (p. 45)
■ To watch the programme
1 Select a current programme or channel


2 Select [View]

text_image
Eastender 19:30- 20:00 View Timer Programming ①select ②watch • To use Timer Programming → (p. 26)- If a programme exists in both HD and SD broadcasts, the [View Options] screen will be displayed to select HD or SD broadcast.


■ To the previous day
(red)
■ To the next day
(green)
■ View details of the programme
1 Select the programme 2 View details

2 View details
• Press again to return to TV Guide.
■ To view a channel list of the selected genre

text_image
(blue) Channel Genre All Channels (Channel Genre list) All Channels Entertainment News & Sport Favourites To list favouritechannels → (p. 54)
■ To search programme types and view a channel list of the searched programmes
(yellow)
(Search list)

text_image
Search Search Titles... Movie News and Factual
① select type
② view
■ To search programme titles and view a list of the searched programmes
(yellow)
(Search list)

text_image
Search Search Titles... Movie News and Factual1 Select
[Search Titles...]

① select
② access
2 Set characters
(maximum : 19 characters)

select
set
• To use numeric buttons
→ "Characters table for numeric buttons" (p. 117)
3 Start
[Search]

(green)
- All the programme titles including the word you set will be listed.
- Searching without any characters will list all programmes including current programmes.
(DVB or Analogue)
• This TV supports the GUIDE Plus+ system. UK only
- The Rovi branding partner will supply the rating information in the programme information and the recommended group in the Search list. UK only
- DVB and Analogue channels are displayed on the same TV Guide screen. [D] means DVB channel and A means Analogue channel. There will be no programme listings for Analogue channels.

text_image
INPUT TV GUIDE EXIT OPTION BACK/ RETURN 1 2 To return to TV EXIT or GUIDESelect DVB or Analogue
→ (p. 19)
TV
2
View TV Guide
GUIDE

text_image
Example : UK 1 Wed 27 Oct 2010 10:46 2 1 BBC ONE 20:00 - 20:30 DIY SOS : We open in the Batteries Time: 18:30 20:00 20:32 21:00 3 D 1 BBC ONE Das Erste DIY SOS Holiday News D 7 BBC THREE Hot Wars Holiday Program D 14 E4 Emmerdal Coronation Street The Bill D 79 BBC FOUR 10 C' clock News BBC Pepsi Char. Good bye D 72 BBC 2W D 16 BBCi D 76 BBC Rad5 Select channel Exit 0 - 91 Enter Channel Info Page up Timer Programming Select programme 300 RETURN Page down RETURN Start Select Advert -24 hours -24 hours Search Category1 Current date and time
2 TV Guide time
3 Advertisement
4 [D]: DVB
5 Channel position and name
6 TV Guide date
7 Some programmes may also be broadcast in HD [UK only]
- You can select HD or SD broadcast before viewing or setting Timer Programming.
8 Programme
9 Logo of the Rovi branding partner UK only
■ To change the layout of TV Guide → [TV Guide View] (p. 45)
■ To watch the programme
1 Select a current programme or channel

①select
②access
or

2 Select [View] (DVB mode)
Eastender 19:30-20:
View
ogramming

① select
② watch
• To use Timer Programming → (p. 26)
- If a programme exists in both HD and SD broadcasts, the [View Options] screen will be displayed to select HD or SD broadcast. (DVB mode) UK only


① select
② watch
■ To the previous day (DVB mode)
(red) (blue)
■ To the next day (DVB mode)
(green)
■ View details of the programme (DVB mode)
1 Select the programme 2 View details

• Press again to return to TV Guide.
■ To view a channel list of the selected category

text_image
(Category list) Category All Channels All Channels All DVB Channels All HD Channels All Analogue Channels Free DVB Channels TV/Data DVB Channels Favourites1 Favourites2 Favourites3 Favourites4 Only Analogue channels are listed To list favourite channels (p. 57)■ To search programme types and view a channel list of the searched programmes (DVB mode)
(yellow)

text_image
UK (Search list) Search Search Titles... Movie News and Factual
text_image
Ireland (Type list) Prog.Type All Types All Types Movie News ...
■ To search programme titles and view a list of the searched programmes (DVB mode) UK only
(yellow)

text_image
(Search list) Search Search Titles... Movie News and Factual ...1 Select [Search Titles...]

2 Set characters (maximum : 19 characters)

- To use numeric buttons "Characters table for numeric buttons" (p. 117)
3 Start [Search]

- All the programme titles including the word you set will be listed. - Searching without any characters will list all programmes including current programmes.
View advertisement (DVB or Analogue mode) UK only
Enter your postcode when using this function for the first time
[Guide Plus+ Postcode] in [TV Guide Settings] (p. 45)
If you have already entered your postcode in "Auto Setup" - when first using the TV (p. 13), you do not have to enter it again.
If you enter an incorrect postcode for your area, or no postcode is entered, advertisements may not be displayed correctly.
Display advertisement information
OPTION

• To display the latest advertisement, you will need to update the information. To update the information continuously, the TV must be left in Standby mode.
■ To change advertisements

■ To return to TV Guide

Note
- Some advertisements are for future programmes.
In this case it is possible to use the Guide link programming function (p. 27). - The advertisements displayed on the TV Guide are sent from the GUIDE Plus+ system so that they cannot be deleted manually or will not be lost even when the TV is turned Off with Mains power On / Off switch.
Timer Programming (freesat or DVB mode)
Timer Programming is a timer to remind watching or record the programme to the external recorder, the USB HDD or the SD Card.
1 Select the forthcoming programme

2 Select the function ([Ext Rec.], [USB HDD Rec.], [SD Card Rec.] or [Reminder])
(Timer Programming screen)
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select the function ([Ext Rec.], [USB HDD Rec.], [SD Card Rec.] or [Reminder]) - 1](/content/2026/05/796352/images/22ca48eca436fd2ea8b0ef654f1791ffff40151fb7cc40781c8001e194c6100c.jpg)
text_image
Timer Programming Wed 27.10.2010 10:46 Function No. Channel Name Date Start End Ext Rec. R DIY 808 Wed 27 Oct 19:30 [B BBC HO 20:00 (30 min.) -- min.)![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select the function ([Ext Rec.], [USB HDD Rec.], [SD Card Rec.] or [Reminder]) - 2](/content/2026/05/796352/images/a71593cca273b0409662b6780188c206ba3e8ab4adfc65e7429861347b7c04b3.jpg)
LED will turn to orange if Timer Programming is set. (Orange LED will flash if the recording of Timer Programming is in progress.)
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select the function ([Ext Rec.], [USB HDD Rec.], [SD Card Rec.] or [Reminder]) - 3](/content/2026/05/796352/images/2edb5b1587d4296c6d5002f6b3a0b3b8616957f253e3245da664b5a967f857e1.jpg)
natural_image
Diagram showing a computer monitor connected to a LED via an cable (no text or symbols present)[Ext Rec.] / [USB HDD Rec.] / [SD Card Rec.]
to record the programme to the external recorder, the USB HDD or the SD Card
When the start time comes, the channel will be switched automatically and the video and audio signals will be output. 2 minutes before the starting time, a reminder message appears if you are watching TV.
For [USB HDD Rec.] / [SD Card Rec.], you can select a recording mode :
[DR] : Direct recording (normal mode)
[LT1] : Long time recording
[LT2] : Extra long time recording
“Recording time for the USB HDD / SD Card Recording” (p. 116)
[Reminder]
to remind you to watch the programme
When you are watching TV, a reminder message appears 2 minutes before the start time. Press the
OK button to switch to the programmed channel.
■ To check / change /
cancel a timer programming event
→ "Timer Programming" (p. 62)
■ If you select a current programme
A confirmation screen asking whether you wish to watch or record the programme will appear.
Select [Timer Programming] and set [Ext Rec.], [USB HDD Rec.] or [SD Card Rec.] to record from the time you finish the timer programming event setting.

text_image
Eastender 19:30- 20:00 View Timer Programming
■ To return to TV Guide

■ If a programme exists in both HD and SD broadcasts UK only
The [Timer Options] screen will be displayed to select HD or SD broadcast.


(Timer Programming screen)

text_image
Timer Programming Wed 27.10.2010 10:46 Function No. Channel Name Date Start End Exit Rec. BY 505 Wed 27 Oct 19:30 [19 BBC HD 2000] (30 min.) (— min.)will be displayed if HD broadcast is set.
Note
• This function is not available in Analogue mode.
- Timer Programming reminder messages will remain displayed until one of the following occurs :
- You press the OK button to view the programme or the EXIT button to cancel the reminder.
- The timer programming event that the reminder is set for ends.
- No other channel can be selected while the recording of Timer Programming is in progress.
- When recording programmes, be sure to make the proper settings on the recorder connected to the TV.
→ (p. 62)
- When recording programmes to the USB HDD, be sure to format the USB HDD and enable it for recording in [Recording Setup] (p. 75).
- When recording programmes to the SD Card, prepare a new SD Card or the SD Card formatted with this TV. (p. 76)
- For more information of the USB HDD / SD Card Recording. (p. 74, 116)
Guide link programming (Timer Programming from the TV Guide signal) UK only
Guide link programming is Timer Programming which is controlled by information from the TV Guide; if programme start and end times are changed by the broadcaster, the timer programming event will follow the change.
A Split Programme programming is a Guide link programming which is interrupted by one or more other programmes.
Note that Guide link programming (including Split Programme programming) only works reliably if correct information is received from broadcasters.
(Timer Programming screen)

text_image
Timer Programming Function No. Date Start EndChannel Name 27 OF BBC ONE DIY SOS 20:00 20:30 (30 min.) Reminder 14 E4 21:00 22:30 The Bill Wed 27 Oct (90 min.) Ext Rec. 72 BBC 2W"S/P" is displayed if the timer is set from the TV Guide and the programme is a Split Programme
Example : UK

text_image
Preview TV Guide Headlines Wed 27 Oct 2010 10:46 VIERA 1 BBC ONE 20.30 - 20.30 DIY SOS : We open in the Ballersbye Time: 19:30 20:00 20:30 21:00 D 1 BBC ONE Das Erste DIY SOS Holiday News D 7 BBC THREE Hot Viers Holiday Program D 14 E4 Emmerdal Coronation Street The Bill D 70 BBC FOUR 10 O' clock News BBC Pepsi Chan Good bye D 72 BBC 2W Panorama Spring watch Coast D 85 BBC I'm A Celebrity Pop Idol News D 719 BBC Rank Rugby 8 To 1 Sports“” or “” will be displayed in the TV Guide if Timer Programming is set as the Guide link programming.
"Guide" is displayed if the timer is set from the TV Guide (Guide link programming)
Note
- If you edit the start time or end time of a Guide link programming event by more than 10 minutes, it will no longer follow the broadcaster's changes to the start or end time. The start and end times will become fixed.
- Whilst making the Split Programme programming event for [Ext Rec.], [USB HDD Rec.] or [SD Card Rec.], you cannot record any channels between the interrupted programmes.
- The Split Programme programming event for Reminder will be cleared by pressing the OK button once to view.
- The Split Programme programming event for Reminder will switch to the programmed channel by pressing the OK button even if it is between the interrupted programmes.
- The Split Programme programming does not work if the separated parts are broadcast on different channels.
(Other Sat. UK / Satellite Ireland)
In Other Sat. or Satellite mode, TV Guide is not available. In stead, Channel List will appear.
• To tune in Other Sat. / Satellite Channels → (p. 60)

text_image
1 Select Other Sat. UK / Satellite Ireland → (p. 19) TV
text_image
1 Select Other Sat. UK / Satellite Ireland → (p. 19) TV
text_image
2 Display the Channel List GUIDE EXIT
text_image
Example : UK All Other Sat. Channels 2 freesatHome 3 freesatSSU 4 Brit Shorts 5 HINRG LOWNRG 6 WELL Class 7 GROOVE 8 - Example : Ireland Satellite Channel List 2 freesatHome 3 freesatSSU 4 Brit Shorts 5 HINRG LOWNRG 6 WELL Class 7 GROOVE 8 -
text_image
■ To return to TV EXIT or GUIDE 3 Select the channel ① select OK ② watchViewing Teletext
You can enjoy news, weather forecasts and subtitles, etc. (depending on the broadcaster)
- The availability of teletext services for a programme is indicated by [TEXT] in the information banner.

text_image
Information banner → (p. 20) 1 BBC ONE WALES Corporation Street 20:00 - 28:55 All DVB Channels Select Favorites Displayed if programme has teletext serviceIreland
Depending on the broadcaster, the digital teletext (MHEG) services may not be available. In this case, the operation of the teletext services may be the same as the analogue teletext services (p. 29).
Digital teletext (MHEG)
Digital teletext services differ greatly from analogue teletext.
When you switch to a digital teletext service, the images you see can contain graphics and text, laid out and controlled in a manner decided by the broadcaster.

text_image
1 Select freesat or DVB → (p. 19) TV • freesat and DVB programmes have digital teletext services (MHEG). 2 Switch to Teletext Example : 17:51 28 Feb To return to TV ■ How to operate services In all cases, it is possible to navigate the pages using buttons on the remote control, but because the commands available must apply to all manufacturers of digital equipment, some on screen commands may not correspond exactly to the remote control buttons. • Select, go • Symbol :◀◀◀◀ • Back key Back/RETURN • Coloured characters Coloured button • When options with numbers are displayedNote
- As soon as you switch to a digital channel with links to a teletext service, software is downloaded in the background to enable the teletext function. This means that when switching to a digital channel, you should wait for approximately 5 seconds before pressing the TEXT button - this will allow the software to download. If you press the TEXT button before download is complete, it will be ignored and you will have to press the TEXT button again when the download is complete.
- While navigating digital teletext, you will find there is a short delay when moving between pages while the page downloads. There is often a prompt shown somewhere on the page (for example "Loading") to let you know that this is happening.
Analogue teletext
Analogue teletext services are the text information provided by the broadcasters.
The features may vary depending on the broadcasters.
What is FASTEXT mode?
In FASTEXT mode, four differently coloured subjects are situated at the bottom of the screen. To access more information about one of these subjects, press the appropriately coloured button. This facility enables fast access to information on the subjects shown.
What is List mode?
In List mode, four differently coloured page numbers are situated at the bottom of the screen. Each of these numbers can be altered and stored in the TV's memory.
→ "Store frequently viewed pages" (p. 30)
■ To change modeletext] (p. 46)

text_image
1 Select Analogue (p. 19) TV 2 Switch to Teletext Displays the index page (content varies depending on the broadcasters) Sub page number << 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 >> P100 17:51 28 Feb Time / date TELETEXT INFORMATION Colour bar Current page number 3 Select the page or up down or Coloured button (Corresponds to the colour bar) To adjust contrast MENU (Press twice) As the blue bar is displayed TO return to TV EXITFULL / TOP / BOTTOM

flowchart
graph LR
A["MENU"] --> B["(green)"]
B --> C["P100 Broadcast"]
C --> D["(Expand the TOP half)"]
D --> E["(Expand the BOTTOM half)"]
E --> F["P100 Broadcast"]
style A fill:#999,stroke:#333
style F fill:#ccc,stroke:#333
Reveal hidden data HOLD
Reveal hidden words e.g. quiz page answers Stop automatic updating

flowchart
graph LR
A["MENU"] --> B["(red)"]
B --> C["Press again to rehide"]
C --> D["(If you wish to hold the current page without updating)"]
D --> E["Press again to resume"]
INDEX Subtitles
Return to the main index page View a favourite page stored


- Factory setting is "P888" (subtitle service) on the blue button (List mode).
View in multi window
Watch TV and Teletext in two windows at once


- Operations can be made only in Teletext screen.
• Each time pressed : Teletext—TV and Teletext

Store frequently viewed pages
Store frequently viewed pages in the colour bar (List mode only)
As page is displayed


(Corresponding coloured button)

press and hold

text_image
P100 Broadcast 101 200 400 888- If you wish to use Subtitles, do not change number on blue button.
The number changes to white.
■ To change stored pages


Enter new page number



press and hold
View sub page
View sub page (Only when teletext is more than one page)


Appears at top of the screen
- The number of sub pages varies depending on the broadcasters (up to 79 pages).
- It may take some time for searching, during which time you can watch TV.
■ To view specific sub page



(blue)


Enter the 4-digit number example : P6


Watch TV while waiting for update
View the TV picture while searching for a teletext page
Teletext automatically updates itself when new information becomes available.

flowchart
graph LR
A["MENU"] --> B["(yellow)"]
B --> C["Changes to TV screen temporarily"]
C --> D["P108"]
D --> E["Appears when updating is completed"]
E --> F["(You cannot change the channel.)"]
F --> G["View the updated page (yellow)"]
- The news page provides a function that indicates arrival of latest news ("News Flash").
Watching External Inputs
Connect the external equipment (VCRs, DVD equipment, etc.) and you can watch through the AV input.
• To connect the equipment →(p.11, 12, 110 - 112)
The Remote Control is capable of operating some functions of selected external equipment.
“Operating the equipment with the TV remote control” (p. 32)

text_image
INPUT TV AV OK 1 2 abc 3 def 4 ghi 5 jkl 6 mno 7 pqs 8 tuv 9 wxyz 0 Panasonic TV DVD/VCR, TV II/▶ [0] To return to TV TV1
Turn the TV on
When connecting with SCART as example 2 or 3 (p. 11, 12)
Receives input signals automatically when playback starts
- Input signals are automatically identified by the SCART (pin 8) terminal.
• This function is also available for HDMI connections (p. 110).
If input mode is not switched automatically
Perform 2 and 3
- Check the setup of the equipment.
2
Display the input selection menu
AV
3
Select the input mode connected to the equipment

text_image
Input Selection AV1 AV2 COMPONENT HDMI1 HDMI2 HDMI3 HDMI4 TV SD Card/USB
- You can also select the input using the AV button on the remote control or the side panel of the TV (except [SD Card/USB]).
Press the button repeatedly until the desired input is selected.
- [SD Card/USB] : Switches to Media Player → "Using Media Player" (p. 79)
- You can label or skip each input mode (except [SD Card/USB]).
→ "Input Labels" (p. 66)
Skipped inputs will not be displayed when the AV button is pressed.
4
View

text_image
AV1 ———— Displays the selected mode| Terminal | AV1 AV2 | COMPONENT | HDMI1 HDMI2 HDMI3 HDMI4 | ||||
| Manual input (default setting in “Input Labels”) | AV1 AV1-RGB | AV2 | COMPONENT | HDMI1 HDMI2 HDMI3 HDMI4 | |||
| Auto input (EC mode or VIERA Link) | EC/AV1 EC/AV1-RGB | - | - | EC/HDMI1 Applicable for EC mode and VIERA Link | EC/HDMI2 Applicable for VIERA Link | EC/HDMI3 Applicable for VIERA Link | EC/HDMI4 Applicable for VIERA Link |
- If the above information is permanently displayed on the top left of the screen, press the i button to clear.
Note
- If the external equipment has an aspect adjustment function, set it to [16:9].
- For details, see the manual of the equipment or ask your local dealer.
Operating the equipment with the TV remote control
The equipment connected to the TV can be directly operated with the below buttons of this TV remote control.
![]() | Selection Switch for operating the connected equipmentSelect “DVD/VCR” to operate Panasonic DVD Recorder, DVD Player, Player theatre, Blu-ray Disc theatre or VCR→“How to change the code for the type of the equipment” (see below)Select “TV” to use in USB HDD / SD Card Recording, Media Player, DLNA operations or VIERA Link→“USB HDD / SD Card Recording” (p. 77)→“Media Player” (p. 80)→“Using DLNA® features” (p. 98)→“VIERA Link Control” (p. 108) |
![]() | StandbySet to Standby mode / Turn on |
![]() | PlayPlayback videocassette / DVD / video content |
![]() | StopStop the operations |
![]() | Rewind / Skip / SearchVCR :Rewind, view the picture rapidly in reverseDVD / video content :Skip to the previous track, title or chapterPress and hold to search backward |
![]() | Fast-forward / Skip / SearchVCR :Fast-forward, view the picture rapidly forwardDVD / video content :Skip to the next track, title or chapterPress and hold to search forward |
![]() | PausePause / ResumeDVD : Press and hold to play at slow speed |
![]() | Channel Up / DownSelect channel |
![]() | RecordStart recording |
How to change the code for the type of the equipment
Each type of the Panasonic equipment has its own remote control code. Please change the code according to the equipment you want to operate.
1 Set the position to "DVD/VCR"

2 Press and hold during the following operations
Enter the appropriate code, see table below


Press

| Type of the equipment Code | |
| DVD Recorder, DVD Player, Blu-ray Disc Player 70 (default) | |
| Player theatre, Blu-ray Disc theatre 71 | |
| VCR 72 |
Note
- Confirm if the remote control works correctly after changing the code.
- The codes may be reset to default values if batteries are replaced.
- Some operations may not be possible on some equipment models.
Viewing 3D images
You can enjoy viewing 3D images with contents or programmes corresponding to the 3D effect by wearing the 3D Eyewear (supplied). “Standard accessories” (p. 6)
This TV supports [Frame Sequential]*1, [Side by Side]*2 and [Top and Bottom]*3 3D formats.
*1 : The 3D format that the images for the left and right eyes are recorded with the high definition quality and alternately played back
*2, *3 : Other available 3D formats
• How to use the 3D Eyewear→(p. 34)
• How to view the 3D images →(p. 36)
Danger
Prohibition of Heating
- Do not put 3D Eyewear in fire, heat it or leave it in places that can get hot.
- 3D Eyewear contains a lithium-ion polymer rechargeable battery, so heating may result in combustion or rupture that may cause burns or fire.
Warning
Small Parts
- 3D Eyewear contains small parts (ferrite core, etc.) and must be kept out of reach of small children to avoid accidental ingestion.
Disassembly
- Do not disassemble or modify the 3D Eyewear.
- When disposing this 3D Eyewear, refer “Disposal” (p. 36) and disassemble properly for removing the rechargeable battery.
Charging
- Charge by connecting the included charging cable to the USB port of this TV. Charging with other devices may result in battery leakage, heating or rupture.
- Do not use the included charging cable for uses other than charging
Caution
To enjoy 3D images safely and comfortably, please read these instructions fully.
3D Eyewear
- Do not drop, exert pressure on, or step on the 3D Eyewear.
- Be careful of the tips of the frame when putting on the 3D Eyewear.
• Always keep the 3D Eyewear in a cool, dry place. - Be careful not to trap a finger in the hinge section of the 3D Eyewear.
Viewing 3D Content
- Do not use the 3D Eyewear if you have a history of over-sensitivity to light, heart problems, or have any other existing medical conditions.
- Please stop using the 3D Eyewear immediately, if you feel tired, are not feeling well or experience any other uncomfortable sensation.
- When you set the effect by using [3D Adjustment], take into account that the vision of 3D images varies among different individuals.
• Take an appropriate break after viewing a 3D movie.
- Take a break of between 30 - 60 minutes after viewing 3D content on interactive devices such as 3D games or computers.
- Be careful not to strike the TV screen or other people unintentionally. When using the 3D Eyewear the distance between the user and screen can be misjudged.
- The 3D Eyewear must only be worn when viewing 3D content.
- If you do not look toward the TV screen for a while when viewing 3D images, the 3D Eyewear may be turned off automatically.
- If you suffer from any eyesight problems (short / far-sighted, astigmatism, eyesight differences in left and right), please ensure to correct your vision before using the 3D Eyewear.
- Stop using the 3D Eyewear if you can clearly see double images when viewing 3D content.
- Do not use the 3D Eyewear at a distance less than the recommended distance.
The recommended viewing distance is at least 3 times of image height.
TX-P55VT30B : 2.1 m or more
TX-P65VT30B : 2.4 m or more
When the top and bottom area of the screen is blackened, such as movies, view the screen at a distance at least 3 times further than the height of the actual image. (That makes the distance closer than above recommended figure.)
3D Eyewear Use
- Pay special attention when children are using the 3D Eyewear.
3D Eyewear should not be used by children younger than about 5 - 6 years old, as a guideline. All children must be fully supervised by parents or guardians who must ensure their safety and health throughout the using 3D Eyewear. - Before using the 3D Eyewear, ensure no breakable objects surrounding the user to avoid any accidental damage or injury.
- Remove the 3D Eyewear before moving around to avoid falling or accidental injury.
• Always store the 3D Eyewear in the case supplied with the 3D Eyewear when not in use. - Use the 3D Eyewear only for the intended purpose and nothing else.
- Do not use 3D Eyewear in the condition of high temperature.
- Do not use if the 3D Eyewear is physically damaged.
- Do not use any devices that emit the infrared signals near the 3D Eyewear, as this may cause the 3D Eyewear false operations.
- Do not use devices (such as mobile phones or personal transceivers) that emit strong electromagnetic waves near the 3D Eyewear as this may cause the 3D Eyewear to malfunction.
- Do not expose the infrared receiver section to bright light such as direct sunshine and fluorescent light. The 3D image may not be displayed correctly.
- Stop using the 3D Eyewear immediately if a malfunction or fault occurs.
- Stop using the 3D Eyewear immediately if you experience any redness, pain, or skin irritation around the nose or temples.
• In rare cases, the materials used in the 3D Eyewear may cause an allergic reaction.
3D Eyewear
3D Eyewear set (2)
• TY-EW3D2MA
3D Eyewear
N5ŽZ00000223

3D Eyewear case

Charging cable
• K2KYYYY00098

Ferrite core
• J0KG00000156

• 3D Eyewear can be worn over vision correction glasses.
Part names and functions

text_image
Infrared rec Receives inf • 3D Eyewea which allow • If the eyew power autor Note • Do not soil Panasonic Indic Light the re Power Switch The 3 "ON". CharInfrared receiver
Receives infrared signals from the TV.
- 3D Eyewear is controlled by receiving infrared signals from the TV, which allows you to view 3D images.
- If the eyewear stops receiving infra-red signal from the TV, the power automatically switches off after 5 minutes.
Note
- Do not soil the infrared receiver section or attach stickers etc. to it.
Lenses - Liquid Crystal Shutter
Controls the images for 3D viewing.
- The left and right liquid crystal shutters are alternately opened and closed in time with the images on the TV screen to achieve the 3D effect.
Note
- Do not apply pressure to or scratch the surface of the liquid crystal shutter.
Indicator lamp
Lights or flashes during use or charging to show the status of the rechargeable battery.
Power switch
Switches on the 3D Eyewear power.
The 3D Eyewear is turned on by setting the power switch to "ON". Set the power switch to "OFF" to turn off the 3D Eyewear.
Charging port
Connect the charging cable.
■ Battery status shown by indicator lamp
| Power / indicator lamp status Battery status | |
| Lights for 2 seconds when turned on Sufficient battery level | |
| Flashes 5 times when turned on Low battery level | |
| Flashes once every 2 seconds when in use Operating normally | |
| Lights continuously when off Charging | |
| Lamp off Power off | |
Attaching Ferrite Core
Be sure to attach the provided ferrite core to the charging cable to reduce interference or electrical noise.
1 Attach the ferrite core as close to USB connector of the charging cable as shown

natural_image
Line drawing of a USB cable with connector, showing terminal and port connections (no text or symbols)2 Close the ferrite core until it clicks

natural_image
Diagram showing two USB connectors connected by a cable, one being replaced by the other (no text or symbols present)Mini USB connector USB coldSecternector
Charging the 3D Eyewear
Preparations
- Set [USB Charge in Standby] in the Setup menu to [On].
- Switch off the 3D Eyewear.
1 Turn the TV to Standby mode with the remote control
2 Connect as shown in the diagram
• The indicator lamp lights red, and charging starts.
- When the indicator lamp turns off, charging is completed. (Approximately 2 hours required)
3 After charging is completed, remove the charging cable

text_image
Mini USB connector USB connectorNote
- Do not turn the TV Off with Mains power On / Off switch during charging.
- For the specification of the rechargeable battery in the 3D Eyewear (p. 131)
Storing and cleaning the 3D Eyewear
- Use the supplied 3D Eyewear case to store the 3D Eyewear.
- Avoid storing the 3D Eyewear in hot or highly humid locations.
- Use a clean, soft and dry cloth to wipe the 3D Eyewear. Otherwise, dirt or dust may scratch the eyewear.
- Do not use benzene, thinner, or wax on the 3D Eyewear, as doing so may cause the paint to peel off.
- Do not submerge the 3D Eyewear in liquid such as water when cleaning.
- During the long period of disuse, full charge the 3D Eyewear once every 6 months to keep the battery performance.
- As the liquid crystal shutters (lens) are fragile and easily broken, be very careful when cleaning them.
Disposal
A lithium-ion polymer rechargeable battery is built in to the 3D Eyewear. Please discard according to local regulations. When disposing this 3D Eyewear, disassemble properly by following the procedure below, and remove the internal rechargeable battery.
Do not disassemble this 3D Eyewear except when disposing of it.
Danger
As the rechargeable battery is specifically for this 3D Eyewear, do not use it for any other device.
- Do not charge the removed battery.
- Do not throw the battery in a fire, or apply heat to it.
- Do not pierce the battery with a nail, subject it to an impact, or dismantle or modify it.
- Do not let the wires touch any other metal or each other.
- Do not carry or store the battery with a necklace, hair pin, or the like.
- Do not charge, use, or leave the battery in a hot location such as near a fire or under the hot sun.
Doing so may cause the battery to generate heat, ignite, or rupture.
Warning
Do not place the removed battery, screws, and other items within reach of infants.
Accidental swallowing of such an item may have an adverse effect on the body.
- In the event that you think such an item has been swallowed, consult a doctor immediately.
In the event of fluid leaking from the battery, take the following measure, and do not touch the fluid with bare hands.
Fluid entering into an eye may cause loss of eyesight.
- Wash the eye with water immediately without rubbing it, and then consult a doctor.
Fluid getting on your body or clothes may cause inflammation of the skin or injury.
- Sufficiently rinse with clean water, and then consult a doctor.
■ How to remove the battery
Disassemble this 3D Eyewear after the battery has run out of power.
The following figures are intended to explain how to dispose of the 3D Eyewear, not for describing how to repair. The 3D Eyewear cannot be repaired once it has been disassembled.
1 Fold the part of the frame without the power switch, and then remove the two screws on the inside of the hinge with a precision Phillips (plus + ) screwdriver.

text_image
Frame Screws2 Bend the frame inwards and pull it off from the side cover.
- If it is difficult to remove, insert a flat-blade (minus - ) screwdriver and force it off.

text_image
Side cover Battery3 Remove the battery from inside the side cover, and cut the two wires one by one with scissors.
• Insulate the wire parts of the removed battery with cellophane tape.

natural_image
Mechanical assembly diagram showing a disassembled component with scissors and a spring (no text or labels)Note
- Take sufficient care when performing this work so as not to injure yourself.
- Do not damage or dismantle the battery.
To view the 3D images
You can enjoy the 3D images in a variety of ways.
(Frame Sequential, Side by Side and Top and Bottom are the supported 3D format.)
■ Playing back 3D-compatible Blu-ray disc (Frame Sequential format)
- Connect the 3D-compatible player via a fully wired HDMI compliant cable.
- If input mode is not switched automatically, select the input mode connected to the player. (p. 31)
- If you use the non 3D-compatible player, the images will be displayed on 2D mode.
■ 3D-supported broadcast
- Please consult the suppliers of contents or programmes for availability of this service.
■ 3D photos and 3D videos taken by 3D-compatible Panasonic products
• Available in Media Player (p. 79) and Network services (p. 91)
■ 2D images converted to 3D
Set to [2D-3D] mode in [3D Mode Selection] (p. 38)
1 Turn the 3D Eyewear on
2 Put on the 3D Eyewear
3 Watch the 3D images
- Safety precautions will be displayed when you first watch the 3D image. Select [Yes] or [No] to continue to view 3D images. If you select [Yes], this message will be displayed again in the same condition after Mains power On / Off switch is next turned On. Select [No] if you do not wish to display this message again.
Example :
Safety Precautions
To enjoy 3D images safely and comfortably, please read the Operating Instructions fully.
Please stop using the 3D Eyewear immediately, if you feel tired, are not feeling well or experience any other uncomfortable sensation.
Always put the 3D Eyewear in the case provided after use.
Would you like to display this message again later?
Yes
4 Turn off the 3D Eyewear after using it
Note
- The 3D image or 3D effect may not be available in the following conditions :
- Multi window (p. 71) is active.
• VIERA Connect home screen (p. 18) is displayed. - [Ext Rec.] or [LT1] / [LT2] of Timer Programming (p. 63) is in progress.
• [LT1] / [LT2] of One Touch Recording (p. 77) is in progress. - Direct TV Recording (p. 104, 106) is in progress.
As for the contents of the Frame Sequential format and Side by Side (Full), no images will be displayed in these conditions.
- If the room is lit by fluorescent lights / dimmers (50 Hz) and light appears to flicker when using the 3D Eyewear, switch off the fluorescent light or set [3D Refresh Rate] to [100Hz] (p.43).
- 3D content will not be correctly visible if the 3D Eyewear is worn upside down or back-to-front.
- Do not wear the 3D Eyewear when watching anything other than 3D images. Liquid crystal displays (such as computer screens, digital clocks or calculators, etc.) may be difficult to see while wearing the 3D Eyewear.
- Do not use the 3D Eyewear as sunglasses.
- 3D effects may be perceived differently depending on the person.
Available range for the 3D Eyewear
If the 3D Eyewear is placed outside the coverage area for about 5 minutes, the 3D Eyewear will be turned off automatically.

text_image
35°35°
text_image
20° 20°: Coverage area for using the 3D Eyewear
View from the top View from the side
- You cannot view the 3D images with the 3D Eyewear too far from the TV, because of the difficulty of receiving infrared signals from the TV.
- The range may be shortened depending on the obstacles between the infrared sensors on the TV and the 3D Eyewear, the dirt on the infrared sensors or the surrounding environment.
- If you do not look toward the TV screen for a while when viewing 3D images, the 3D Eyewear may be turned off automatically even if in the coverage area.
- There are differences in the viewing range of the 3D Eyewear among individuals.
- The 3D Eyewear may not operate correctly at the outside of the viewing range.
Changing 2D - 3D mode
You can easily change the viewing mode between 2D and 3D using the 3D button.



text_image
Select the mode 3D Mode Selection 2D →3D 3D 2D ① select OK ② set- Items of [3D Mode Selection] vary depending on the condition.
[3D] / [2D] / [2D→3D]:
Displays the appropriate image that you desire without selecting 3D format
- This mode may not work properly depending on the source image format. In this case, select the appropriate 3D format manually.
■ To change 3D format manually
When the image is not changed properly using [3D], [2D] or [2D-3D] mode, use this manual setting.
During the above operation Select the mode

(red)


text_image
3D Mode Selection (Manual) Original Frame Sequential - 3D Frame Sequential - 2D Side by Side - 3D Side by Side - 2D Top and Bottom - 3D Top and Bottom - 2D 2D-3D
①select ②set
[Original] : Displays the source image as it is
- Use to identify the format type of the source image.
“Table of images that can be seen for each [3D Mode Selection (Manual)] and the source image format” (see below)
[Frame Sequential - 3D] / [Frame Sequential - 2D] / [Side by Side - 3D] / [Side by Side - 2D] /
[Top and Bottom - 3D] / [Top and Bottom - 2D] : Displays the mode you select
• Not valid on Analogue and AV mode
[2D→3D] : Converts 2D images into 3D
- For DVB, Analogue, AV, Component, HDMI, Media Player and network service operations
- On-screen displays are also seen in 3D in this mode.
- Please note the 3D images appear slightly different from the originals.
- Using this function for profit-making purposes, or publicly showing images converted from 2D to 3D in places such as shops or hotels etc. may infringe on the rights of the copyright holder protected under copyright law.
Table of images that can be seen for each [3D Mode Selection (Manual)] and the source image format
If the picture appears to be abnormal, refer to the table below to choose the correct 3D mode.
| Sourceimage format 3D Mode Selection | [Original] | [Frame Sequential - 3D] | [Side by Side - 3D] | [Top and Bottom - 3D] | [2D-3D] |
| Frame Sequential | ![]() | Normal 3D*1 | ![]() | ![]() | ![]() |
| Side by Side (Full) | ![]() | ![]() | Normal 3D*1 | ![]() | ![]() |
| Side by Side | ![]() | ![]() | Normal 3D*1 | ![]() | ![]() |
| Top and Bottom | ![]() | ![]() | ![]() | Normal 3D*1 | ![]() |
| Normal format (2D) | ![]() | ![]() | ![]() | ![]() | Normal 3D |
*1: When selecting [Frame Sequential - 2D], [Side by Side - 2D] or [Top and Bottom - 2D], the images will be displayed without 3D effect.
- Depending on the player or broadcasts, the image may be different from the above illustrations.
3D Settings
If the 3D images are not displayed correctly or seem unusual, please adjust and setup the 3D settings.

flowchart
graph TD
A["To return to TV"] --> B["1 Display the menu MENU"]
B --> C["2 Select [Picture"]]
C --> D["3 Select [3D Settings"]]
D --> E["4 Select one of the following functions and set"]
| Item Adjustments / Configurations (alternatives) | |
| 2D 3D Depth | Selects a level of 3D-image depth for viewing converted 2D images [Min] / [Mid] / [Max] |
| 3D Adjustment | Adjustment of the 3D effect (except in [2D-3D] mode) [Off] / [On]Set to [On] to enable [Effect] setting.When setting to [On], a safety precaution message will appear. Read it carefully and then press the BACK/RETURN button to go to [Effect] setting.[Effect]: Adjust the 3D depth according to the contents or to your preference. |
| Picture Sequence | Select [Reverse] if you feel that the sense of depth is unusual (except in [2D-3D] mode)[Normal] / [Reverse] |
| Edge Smoother | Set to [On] if you feel the contoured parts of an image are not smooth enough (except in [2D→3D] mode) [Off] / [On] |
| 3D Detection | Automatically detects the 3D format signals [Off] / [On] / [On (Advance)][On (Advance)]: Detects all the 3D format signals and displays the 3D image automatically.[On]: Detects the particular 3D format signals (Frame Sequential, etc.) and displays the 3D image automatically.To view 3D images without any notifications and operations, set to [On (Advance)]. |
| 3D Signal Message | Selects whether to give a notification message when a signal of 3D format is found [Off] / [On]For DVB, Component and HDMIThis function is not available when [3D Detection] is set to [On (Advance)]. |
| Safety Precautions | Displays the precautions for viewing 3D images |
Note
• [3D Adjustment] and [Picture Sequence] will not be memorized when changing the input mode or channel.
How to Use VIERA TOOLS
You can access some special features easily by using the VIERA TOOLS function.
- For [VIERA Link Control] and [Pause Live TV] functions to operate correctly, ensure the connections and settings are completed.
“Summary of Q-Link and VIERA Link features” (p. 102, 103), “Preparations” (p. 105)
After connection, turn the equipment on and then switch the TV on. - For [Photo], [Video] and [Music] functions to operate correctly, ensure the device has photo or video data on it and insert it into the SD Card slot or USB port properly.
→ "Using Media Player" (p. 79)

text_image
TOOLS EXIT OKTo return to TV
EXIT
or
VIERA


1
Display icons of the feature
VIERA

2
Select a feature

text_image
VIERA Link Control
① select
②access
■ Follow the operations of each feature
[VIERA Link Control]
→ "VIERA Link Control" (p. 107)

When two or more compatible equipment are connected, a selection screen will be displayed. Please select the correct description and access.
[Photo]*
→ "Photo mode" (p. 80)

[Video]*
→ "Video mode" (p. 85)

[Recorded TV]*
→ "Recorded TV mode" (p. 87)

[Music]*
→ "Music mode" (p. 89)

[Media Server]*
→ "Using DLNA® features" (p. 98)

* When two or more available devices are connected, a selection screen will be displayed. Please select the correct description and access.
Note
- If the selected feature is not available, the demonstration to explain how to use it can be displayed. Press the OK button to view the demonstration after selecting the unavailable feature.
How to Use Menu Functions
Various menus allow you to make settings for the picture, sound, and other functions.

text_image
MENU EXIT OK BACK/ RETURN Panasonic TVTo return to TV at any time

To return to the previous screen


To change menu pages

1 Display the menu
- Displays the functions that can be set (varies according to the input signal)
2 Select the menu

text_image
VIENA Main Menu Picture Sound Timer Setup
3 Select the item
Example : [Picture Menu]

text_image
Viewing Mode Contrast Brightness Colour Sharpness Tint Colour Balance Vivid Colour C.A.T.S. Off Warm Off
■ Choose from among alternatives

text_image
Colour Balance Cool Normal Warm■ Adjust using the slide bar

■ Go to the next screen

Displays the next screen
■ To reset the settings
• To reset the picture settings only
[Reset to Defaults] in the Picture Menu (p. 43)
• To reset the sound settings only
[Reset to Defaults] in the Sound Menu (p. 45)
• To initialise all settings
→ [Shipping Condition] in the Setup Menu (p. 67)
■ Enter characters by free input menu
You can enter names or numbers freely for some items.

text_image
User input Name A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ! : # a b c d =f g h -i -j k -m n-o-p&q r s: u V W X Y Z ( ) + - .* _ 1_ 2_ 3_ #1 #2 #3 #3 #4 #5 #7 #8 #9 0Set characters


Store


- You can set characters by using numeric buttons.
"Characters table for numeric buttons" (p. 117)
Note
- If "Demo Settings" item is displayed in the Setup Menu, the TV is in "Shop" viewing environment. To return to "Home" viewing environment initialise all settings by accessing Shipping Condition.
→ (p. 67)
Menu list
| Menu | Item Adjustments / Configurations (alternatives) | |
| Picture | Viewing Mode | Basic picture mode [Dynamic] / [Normal] / [Cinema] / [THX (True Cinema)] / [Game] / [Photo] / [Professional1] / [Professional2]In each Viewing Mode, [Contrast], [Brightness], [Colour], [Sharpness], [Tint], [Colour Balance], [Vivid Colour], [C.A.T.S.], [P-NR] and [3D-COMB] can be adjusted and stored to suit your particular viewing requirement.Set for each input signal.[Dynamic]: Provides enhanced picture contrast and sharpness when viewing in a bright room.[Normal]: Recommended for viewing under normal ambient room lighting conditions.[Cinema]: For watching movies in a darkened room with the improved performance of contrast, black and colour reproduction[THX (True Cinema)]:Precisely reproduces the original quality of the image without any revision. Recommended for playback of THX disc (disc with [THX] logo)THX mode is used to mirror the picture settings used by professional filmmakers, faithfully reproducing the image quality of THX Certified movies.THX Certified movies have the [THX] logo on a disc.[True Cinema] is displayed instead of [THX] in the mode of Media Player and network service operations.[Game]: Fast response signal specifically to provide suitable images for playing gamesNot valid on TV modeA continuous record of time spent using Game mode can be displayed in the top right of the screen. ▪[Playing Time Display] (p. 47)[Photo]:Set [Reversal Film Effect] to [On] to provide the suitable image quality for photosFor HDMI input, Media Player and network service operations[Professional1 / 2]:Allows you to set the professional picture settings in [Advanced Settings], [Lock Settings] and [Copy Adjustment] ➔(p. 72)This mode is available only when [Advance(isfccc)] in the Setup Menu is set to [On].Not valid on VIERA ConnectIf the certified professional dealer sets these modes, [Professional1] and [Professional2] may be displayed as [isf Day] and [isf Night]. |
| Contrast, Brightness, Colour, Sharpness | Increases or decreases the levels of these options according to your personal preference | |
| Tint | With an NTSC signal source connected to the TV, the picture hue can be adjusted to suit your tasteFor NTSC signal reception only | |
| Colour Balance | Allows you to set the overall colour tone of the picture [Cool] / [Normal] / [Warm]Not valid when [Viewing Mode] is set to [THX (True Cinema)], [Professional1] or [Professional2]. | |
| Vivid Colour | Automatically adjusts colours to vivid ones [Off] / [On]Not valid when [Viewing Mode] is set to [Professional1] or [Professional2]. | |
| Reversal Film Effect | Provides the picture effect such as the reversal film [Off] / [On]This function is available when [Viewing Mode] is set to [Photo]. | |
| C.A.T.S. | Contrast Automatic Tracking System (Automatic Brightness Control function)Adjusts picture settings automatically dependent on ambient lighting conditions [Off] / [On]Set to [On] to make the suitable contrast setting automatically. The default setting is [On] when [Viewing Mode] is set to [Normal]. | |
| P-NR | Picture Noise ReductionAutomatically reduces unwanted picture noise and flicker noise in the contoured parts of a picture [Off] / [Min] / [Mid] / [Max] | |
| 3D-COMB | Makes still or slow moving pictures look more vivid [Off] / [On]Occasionally, whilst viewing still or slow moving pictures, colour patterning may be seen. Set to [On] to display sharper and more accurate colours.For PAL or NTSC signal reception onlyNot valid on RGB, Component, HDMI and Media Player | |
| Menu | Item Adjustments / Configurations (alternatives) | ||
| Picture | Picture in Picture Displays two windows at once (p. 71) | ||
| 3D Settings Adjusts and sets to view 3D images (p. 39) | |||
| Screen Display | Turns the screen off when you select [Off] [Off] / [On]The sound is active even if the screen turns off.Press any buttons (except Standby) to turn the screen on.This function is effective in reducing power consumption when listening to the sound without watching the TV screen. | ||
| Intelligent Frame Creation | Automatically compensates the picture frame rate and removes juddering movements to make the images smooth [Off] / [Mid] / [Max]Depending on the contents, images may be noisy. To prevent the noise, change the setting.This function is not available for selection (default to [Off]) when [Viewing Mode] is set to [Game] or in the mode of multi window / network service operations. | ||
| 24p Smooth Film | Automatically compensates the picture frame rate to make the 24p source movie images smooth [Off] / [Mid] / [Max]This is available only for 24p signal input and displayed instead of [Intelligent Frame Creation].This function is not available for selection (default to [Off]) when [Viewing Mode] is set to [Game] or in the mode of multi window / network service operations. | ||
| Clear Cinema | Improves vertical resolution for movie images [Off] / [On]This function is available for the interlaced signal (except when [Viewing Mode] is set to [Game]). | ||
| 3D Refresh Rate | Reduces juddering and flicker noises of the 3D images [Auto] / [100Hz]If the room is lit by fluorescent lights / dimmers (50 Hz) and light appears to flicker when using the 3D Eyewear, set to [100Hz]. | ||
| Resolution Enhancer | Enhances the picture resolution to make the image sharper [Off] / [Mid] / [Max]This function is available for SD (Standard definition) signal.As for HD (High definition) signal, this function is available when aspect mode is set to [16:9] ([16:9 Overscan] is set to [On]) or [Zoom].Not valid on Media Player and network service operations | ||
| Side Panel | Increases the brightness of the side panel [Off] / [Low] / [Mid] / [High]The recommended setting is [High] to prevent panel “image retention”. | ||
| 16:9 Overscan | Selects the screen area displaying the image [Off] / [On][On] : Enlarges the image to hide the edge of the image.[Off] : Displays the image in the original size.Set to [On] if noise is generated on the edge of the screen.This function is available when aspect is set to [Auto] (16:9 signal only) or [16:9].This function can be memorized separately for SD (Standard definition) and HD (High definition) signals.Not valid on VIERA Connect | ||
| DVI Input Setting | Changes the black level in the image for HDMI input mode with DVI input signal manually [Normal] / [Full]When the DVI input signal from the external equipment, especially from PC, is displayed, the black level may not be suitable. In this case, select [Full].The black level for HDMI input signal will be adjusted automatically.For HDMI input mode with DVI input signal only | ||
| Pixel Orbiter | Selects the mode for wobbling of the image to prevent panel “image retention” [Auto] / [On][Auto] : Automatically works only for the appropriate images and you rarely recognise the wobbling. | ||
| Scrolling Bar | Scrolls the vertical bar to prevent panel “image retention”Press the OK button to start scrolling and press any buttons (except Standby) to exit this mode. | ||
| Reset to Defaults | Press the OK button to reset the present Picture Viewing Mode to the default settings | ||
| Sound | Mode | Selects the basic sound mode [Music] / [Speech] / [User]The selected mode affects all input signals.[Music] : Improves sound quality for watching music videos, etc.[Speech] : Improves sound quality for watching news, drama, etc.Music and Speech modes use CONEQTM brand equalization technology to improve sound quality. CONEQ equalizes acoustic power frequency response and corrects time and phase alignment errors of a speaker system. Speakers with CONEQ perform as near-perfect electro-acoustic transducers providing true to the original sound with the highest musically and intelligibility.In Music and Speech modes, you can adjust [Bass] and [Treble] settings, and those settings will be stored for each mode.[User] : Adjusts the sounds manually by using the equaliser to suit your favourite sound quality.For the User mode, [Equaliser] will appear on the Sound Menu instead of [Bass] and [Treble]. Select the [Equaliser] and adjust the frequency.→[Equaliser] (see below) | |
| Bass | Increases or decreases level to enhance or minimise lower, deeper sound output | ||
| Treble | Increases or decreases level to enhance or minimise sharper, higher sound output | ||
| Equaliser | Adjusts the frequency level to suit your favourite sound qualityThis function is available when [Mode] is set to [User].Select the frequency and change the frequency level by using the cursor button.If you want to enhance the bass sound, raise the level of the lower frequency. If you want to enhance the treble sound, raise the level of the higher frequency.To reset the levels of each frequency to the default settings, select the [Reset to Defaults] by using the cursor button, and then press the OK button. | ||
| Balance Adjusts volume level of right and left speakers | |||
| Headphone Volume Adjusts the volume of the headphones | |||
| Surround | Surround sound settings[Off] / [V-Audio] / [V-Audio Surround] / [V-Audio ProSurround][V-Audio] : Provides a dynamic enhancer of width to simulate improved spatial effects[V-Audio Surround] : Provides a dynamic enhancer of width and depth to simulate improved spatial effects[V-Audio ProSurround] : Provides a more progressive enhancer and reverberation to simulate improved spatial effects | ||
| Auto Gain Control | Automatically regulates large sound level differences between channels and inputs [Off] / [On] | ||
| Volume Correction Adjusts the volume of individual channel or input mode | |||
| Speaker Distance to Wall | Compensates for the distance between the speakers and the wall[Over 30cm] / [Up to 30cm]If the distance between the TV and wall is over 30 cm, [Over 30cm] is recommended.If the distance between the TV and wall is within 30 cm, [Up to 30cm] is recommended. | ||
| Preferred Multi Audio | Selects the preferred language for digital channel multi audio (depending on the broadcaster) [English] / [Welsh] / [Gaelic] / [Irish] | ||
| NICAM | Near Instantaneous Companded Audio MultiplexReproduces NICAM stereo sound [Off] / [On]Off if reception is poor (FM monaural sound)Analogue mode only | ||
| SPDIF Selection | SPDIF : A standard audio transfer file formatSelects the initial setting for digital audio output signal from DIGITAL AUDIO OUT and HDMI2 (ARC function) terminals [Auto] / [PCM][Auto] : Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby Digital and HE-AAC (48 kHz) multi-channel are output as Dolby Digital Bitstream. MPEG is output as PCM.[PCM] : Digital output signal is fixed to PCM.For freesat, DVB mode, Other Sat / Satellite, network video contents (p. 99) or Video mode of Media Player (p. 85)ARC (Audio Return Channel) : A function of digital audio output using HDMI cable | ||
| Sound | HDMI1 / 2 / 3 / 4Input | Select to fit the input signal [Digital] / [Analogue] (p. 117)[Digital] : When sound is carried via the HDMI cable connection[Analogue] : When sound is not carried via the HDMI cable connection• HDMI input mode only | |
| Audio DescriptionMenu [UK only] | Audio Description | Narration settings for visually impaired users [Off] / [Auto]Set to [Auto] to activate the narration sound track when available on the broadcast• The availability of audio description sound track is indicated by [AD] in the information banner (p. 20).• For freesat or DVB mode | |
| Volume | Adjusts the volume for Audio Description• DVB mode only | ||
| Speakers | Set to [On] to activate the description sound track from TV speakers [Off] / [On]• DVB mode only | ||
| Headphones | Set to [On] to activate the description sound track from headphones [Off] / [On]• DVB mode only | ||
| Reset to Defaults | Press the OK button to reset the present Sound Mode, [Balance], [Headphone Volume] and [Surround] to the default settings | ||
| Timer | Timer Programming | Sets programme reminders and records forthcoming programmes (p. 62) | |
| Off Timer | Sets the time until the TV automatically goes to Standby mode [Off] / [15] / [30] / [45] / [60] / [75] / [90] (minutes) (p. 21) | ||
| Auto Standby | Sets the duration of time that the TV will remain On when no operation is received from the user [Off] / [2] / [4] (hours)• Starting Timer Programming automatically does not affect this function.• Automatic input switching with the connected equipment affects this function and time-count will be reset.• The notification message will appear 3 minutes before going to Standby mode. | ||
| Setup | TV Guide Settings | TV Guide View | Changes the layout of TV Guide [Normal] / [Full] / [Info][Normal] : Default TV Guide screen[Full] : Displays channels and programmes full-screen without the operation guide[Info] : Displays details of the selected programme at the bottom without the operation guide |
| GUIDE Plus+ Postcode [UK only] | Sets your postcode to display advertisements in the GUIDE Plus+ system (p. 25)• Not valid on freesat mode | ||
| GUIDE Plus+ Information [UK only] | Displays the system information of the GUIDE Plus+ system• Not valid on freesat mode | ||
| Eco Navigation | Automatically sets the TV to the most suitable energy-saving mode• If you press the OK button, the following items are set as below : [C.A.T.S.], [VIERA Link], [Standby Power Save], [Power Save]→[On][Intelligent Auto Standby]→[On (No reminder)][Auto Standby]→[2 hours] | ||
| Recording Setup Settings for the recording feature of the USB HDD / SD Card (p. 75) | |||
| Link Settings | VIERA Link Settings for VIERA Link functions [Off] / [On] (p. 105) | ||
| HDMI Content Detection | Automatically adjusts picture according to received HDMI content [Off] / [Auto]• This function is available if the connected equipment supports HDMI Content Type.• The content type information will be displayed for several seconds when this function works. | ||
| AV1 out | Chooses the signal to be transmitted from the TV to Q-Link [TV] / [AV2] / [Monitor][Monitor] : Image displayed on screen• Component and HDMI signals cannot be output. | ||
| Standby Power Save | Controls the connected equipment to reduce power consumption in Standby [Off] / [On] (p. 106)• This function is available when [VIERA Link] is set to [On]. | ||
| Setup | Link Settings | Intelligent Auto Standby | Makes non-watched or non-used connected equipment go into Standby mode to reduce the power consumption [Off] / [On (With reminder)] / [On (No reminder)] (p. 106)This function is available when [VIERA Link] is set to [On]. |
| Q-Link Download | Downloads analogue channel information to a Q-Link compatible equipment connected to the TV | ||
| Child Lock | Applies access control for channels or AV inputs to prevent unwanted access (p. 64) | ||
| freesat Tuning Menu UK only | Favourites Edit Creates a list of favourite freesat channels (p. 54) | ||
| Channel List Skips the unwanted freesat channels (p. 55) | |||
| Regional Channel Edit | Replace your regional channels with available channels from another region (p. 55) | ||
| Auto Setup | Automatically searches for the freesat channels received in the area (p. 52) | ||
| Signal Condition Checks the freesat signal condition (p. 55) | |||
| DVB Tuning Menu | Favourites Edit | Creates a list of favourite DVB channels (p. 57) | |
| Channel List | Skips the unwanted DVB channels or edits DVB channels (p. 58) | ||
| Auto Setup | Automatically searches for the DVB channels received in the area (p. 53) | ||
| Channel Sorting by Region UK only | Automatically sorts tuned channels according to the available region (p. 56) | ||
| Manual Tuning | Searches for the DVB channels manually (p. 56) | ||
| Update Channel List | Updates DVB Channel List while keeping your settings (p. 58) | ||
| New Channel Message | Searches for whether to give a notification message when a new DVB channel is found [Off] / [On] (p. 57) | ||
| Signal Condition | Checks the DVB signal condition (p. 57) | ||
| Analogue Tuning Menu | Channel List | Skips the unwanted Analogue channels or edits Analogue channels (p. 59) | |
| Auto Setup | Automatically searches for the Analogue channels received in the area (p. 53) | ||
| Manual Tuning | Searches for the Analogue channels manually (p. 59) | ||
| Satellite Tuning Menu Ireland | Favourites Edit | Creates a list of favourite Other Satellite channels (p. 61) | |
| Channel List | Skips the unwanted Other Satellite channels or edits Other Satellite channels (p. 61) | ||
| Auto Setup | Automatically searches for the Other Satellite channels received in the area (p. 60) | ||
| Manual Tuning | Searches for the Other Satellite channels manually (p. 61)Please consult the received satellite broadcasting companies for the setting. | ||
| Add New Channels | Adds new Other Satellite channels to Channel List (p. 61) | ||
| Signal Condition | Checks the condition of Other Satellite signals (p. 55) | ||
| Display Settings | Teletext | Analogue teletext display mode [FASTEXT] / [List] (p. 28) | |
| Teletext Character Set Ireland only | Selects teletext language font [West] / [East1] / [East2][West]: English, French, German, Greek, Italian, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish, etc.[East1]: Czech, English, Estonian, Lettish, Rumanian, Russian, Ukrainian, etc.[East2]: Czech, Hungarian, Lettish, Polish, Rumanian, etc. | ||
| Preferred Teletext Ireland only | Selects the preferred language for digital channel teletext service (depending on the broadcaster)[English] / [Welsh] / [Gaelic] / [Irish] | ||
| Preferred Subtitles | Selects the preferred language for digital channel subtitles (depending on the broadcaster)[English] / [Welsh] / [Gaelic] / [Irish]To display subtitles ➔ (p. 22)provides aids in understanding and enjoyment with DVB subtitles (depending on the broadcaster). | ||
| Menu | Item Adjustments / Configurations (alternatives) | |
| Setup | Display Settings | Input Labels Label's or skips each input terminal (p. 66) |
| Banner Display Timeout Sets how long the Information banner (p. 20) stays on screen [0 (No display)] / [1] / [2] / [3] / [4] / [5] / [6] / [7] / [8] / [9] / [10] (seconds) | ||
| VIERA Connect Banner Sets the VIERA Connect introduction banner display [Off] / [On] (p. 18, 19) | ||
| Playing Time Display Set to [On] to display a continuous record of time spent using Game mode every 30 minutes [Off] / [On]This function is available when [Game] is selected in [Viewing Mode](p. 42) | ||
| Radio Mode Sets the timer for turning off the screen automatically when a radio channel is selected [Off] / [5] / [10] / [15] / [20] (seconds)The sound is active even if the screen turns off.Press any buttons except Standby, Volume Up / Down and Sound Mute buttons to turn the screen on.This function is effective in reducing power consumption when listening to a radio channel. | ||
| Network Setup Sets the network setting to use in your network environment (p. 93) | ||
| DivX® VOD Displays DivX VOD registration code (p. 115) | ||
| Advance(isfccc) | Enables the advanced picture settings [Off] / [On].Set to [On] to enable the mode of [Professional1] and [Professional2] in [Viewing Mode].Set to [On] to display the advanced items in the Picture Menu - [Advanced Settings], [Lock Settings] and [Copy Adjustment].[Copy Adjustment] will be displayed when [Viewing Mode] is set to [Professional1] or [Professional2].[isfccc] is the picture setting for the certified professional dealer.For details, consult your local dealer. | |
| System Menu | USB Keyboard Layout Selects the language that your USB Keyboard supportsFor the information of using USB Keyboard (p. 118) | |
| Shipping Condition Resets all settings, for example, when moving house (p. 67) | ||
| Owner ID Inputs the owner ID (p. 68) | ||
| Common Interface Settings for watching encrypted channels (p. 69) | ||
| System Update Downloads new software to this TV (p. 70) | ||
| Software Licence Displays the software licence information | ||
| System Information Displays the system information of this TV | ||
| Other Settings | Power on Preference Automatically selects the input when the TV is turned on [TV] / [AV] Set to [TV] to view picture from TV tuner.Set to [AV] to view input from an external equipment connected to a SCART terminal, e.g. cable TV box.The external equipment must be switched on and sending a control signal for automatic switching at power on to occur. | |
| Power on Channel List Automatically selects All Channels or Favourites list in the Information banner (p. 20) when the TV is turned on [All Channel List] / [Last] Set to [All Channel List] to display all the channels.Set to [Last] to display the one you selected last time.Not available on freesat or analogue mode | ||
| USB Charge in Standby Enables to supply the power from the USB port in Standby mode [Off] / [On].Available for charging 3D Eyewear (supplied).This function is available when in Standby mode. | ||
| Power Save Reduces brightness of picture to economise on power consumption [Off] / [On] | ||
- A different menu will be displayed when [Advance(isfccc)] in the Setup Menu is set to [On] or in the mode of Media Player / network service operations. (p. 72, 79 - 90, 98 - 101)
- Only available items can be selected.
Overview (Picture, Sound, Timer, Setup)
How to operate →(p. 41)

text_image
VIEW Main Menu Picture Sound Timer Setup
text_image
Viewing Mode Dynamic Contrast Brightness Colour Sharpness Tint Colour Balance Warm Vivid Colour Off Reversal Film Effect Off| C.A.T.S. | Off |
| P-NR | Off |
| 3D-COMB | Off |
| Picture in Picture | Access |
| Access | |
| Screen Display | On |
| Access | |
| Reset to Defaults | Reset |
(p. 42, 43)
3D Settings
| 2D→3D Depth | Mid |
| 3D Adjustment | Access |
| Picture Sequence | Normal |
| Edge Smoother | Off |
| 3D Detection | On |
| 3D Signal Message | On |
| Safety Precautions | Access |
(p. 39)
Available in NTSC
Not available when [Viewing Mode] is set to [THX (True Cinema)] or [Professional1 / 2]
Not available when [Viewing Mode] is set to [Professional1 / 2]
Available when [Viewing Mode] is set to [Photo]
Available in NTSC / PAL
| Advanced Settings | |
| White Balance | |
| Colour Management | Access |
| Gamma | Access |
| Intelligent Frame Creation | Off |
| 24p Smooth Film | Off |
| Clear Cinema | Off |
| 3D Refresh Rate | Auto |
| Resolution Enhancer | Off |
| Off | |
| Advanced Settings | |
| Off | |
| DVI Input Setting | Normal |
| Pixel Orbiter | Auto |
| Scrolling Bar | Start |
(p. 43, 72, 73)

text_image
Mode Music Bass Treble Equaliser Access Balance Headphone Volume Surround Off Auto Gain Control Off Volume Correction Speaker Distance to Wall Over 30cm
text_image
2/2 Preferred Multi Audio English NICAM Off SPDIF Selection Auto HDMI1 Input Digital Audio Description Access Reset to Defaults Reset(p. 44, 45)
Available when [Mode] is set to [Music] or [Speech]

text_image
Equaliser Reset to Defaults 150 250 500 1k 2k 4k 8k 12k HzAvailable when [Mode] is set to [User]
Available in DVB
Available in Analogue
Available in DVB, network video contents or Video mode
Available in HDMI input
Available in freesat or DVB UK only freesat :

DVB :
| Audio Description Menu | |
| Audio Description | Off |
| Volume | |
| Speakers | Off |
| Headphones | Off |
(p. 45)

text_image
Timer Programming Wed 27.10.2010 10:46 Function No. Channel Name Date Start End Ext Rec. 72 BBC 2W 20:00 21:30 Wed 27 Oct (90 min.)(p. 62)

flowchart
graph TD
A["Setup"] --> B["TV Guide Settings"]
B --> C["Eco Navigation"]
B --> D["Recording Setup"]
B --> E["Link Settings"]
B --> F["Child Lock"]
B --> G["freesat Tuning Menu"]
B --> H["DVB Tuning Menu"]
B --> I["Analogue Tuning Menu"]
B --> J["Other Sat. Tuning Menu"]
C --> K["TV Guide Settings"]
D --> L["Recording Setup"]
E --> M["Link Settings"]
F --> N["Children Lock-PIN Entry"]
G --> O["Children Lock"]
H --> P["Children Lock List"]
I --> Q["Children Lock List - TV and AV"]
J --> R["Children Lock List - TV and AV"]
K --> S["TV Guide Settings Menu"]
L --> T["Recording Setup"]
M --> U["Link Settings"]
N --> V["Sending Preset Data"]
O --> W["Contact to Children Lock Pin"]
P --> X["Contact to Children Lock List"]
Overview (Setup)
How to operate →(p. 41)

text_image
VIEW Main Menu Picture Sound Timer Setup
text_image
TV Guide Settings Eco Navigation Access Recording Setup Access Link Settings Access Child Lock Access freesat Tuning Menu Access DVB Tuning Menu Access Analogue Tuning Menu Access Other Sat. Tuning Menu Access Satellite Tuning Menu Press
text_image
2/2 Display Settings Access Network Setup Access DivX® VOD Access Advance(isfcc) Off Access Access(p. 45 - 47)
| Other Settings | |
| Power on Preference | TV |
| Power on Channel List | Last |
| USB Charge in Standby | Off |
| Off | |
(p. 47)
--- Not
available in
freesat or
Analogue

text_image
System Menu USB Keyboard Layout English(UK) Shipping Condition Access Owner ID Access Common Interface Access System Update Access Software Licence Access System Information Access(p. 47)

(p. 70)

Available in DVB or Other (p. 69)
Sat. UK / Satellite Ireland
Owner ID
Please enter new PIN
PIN

(p. 68)
Shipping Condition
All tuning data will be erased
Are you sure?
Are you sure?
(p. 67)
freesat Tuning Menu
| Favourites Edit | Access |
| Channel List | Access |
| Regional Channel Edit | Access |
| Auto Setup | Access |
| Signal Condition | Access |
Available in (p. 52, 54, 55)
freesat UK only
DVB Tuning Menu
| Favourites Edit | Access |
| Channel List | Access |
| Auto Setup | Access |
| Channel Sorting by Region | Access |
| Manual Tuning | Access |
| Update Channel List | Access |
| New Channel Message | On |
| Signal Condition | Access |
Available in DVB (p. 53, 56 - 58)
DVB Update Channel List
| Progress CH 21:36 | |||
| This will take about 3 minutes. | |||
| CH Channel Name: Type Quality | |||
| Free TV: 0 Pay TV: 0 Data: 0Radio: 0 Searching | |||
(p. 58)
Analogue Tuning Menu
| Channel List | Access |
| Auto Setup | Access |
| Manual Tuning | Access |
Available in (p. 53, 58, 59) Analogue
Example : UK
Other Satellite Tuning Menu
| Access | |
| Manual Tuning | Access |
| Add New Channels | Access |
| Signal Condition | Access |
Available in (p. 60, 61)
Other Sat. UK /
Satellite Ireland
Network Setup
| Connection Test | Access |
| Network Type | |
| Access Point Settings | Access |
| IP/DNS Settings | Access |
| Network Link Settings | Access |
| Software Update | Access |
| MAC Address | ab-cd-ef-gh-ij-kl |
(p. 93)

text_image
freesat Auto Setup Searching Signal Quality 0 10 Signal Strength 0 10 TV Channels Found 8 Radio Channels Found 2 Data Channels Found 1 Channels found, creating channel list.
text_image
freesat Channel List ✓ 101 BBC 1 Scotland ✓ 102 BBC 2 Scotland ✓ 103 stv □ 104 stv □ 108 BBC THREE ✓ 109 BBC FOUR ✓ 110 BBC HD(p. 52)
(p. 55)
| freesat Favourites Editor | |
| All freesat Channels | Favourites1 |
| 1 BBC One Wales | |
| 7 BBC THREE | |
| 14 E4 CBBC Channel70 72 Cartoon Nwk 105 BBCi | |
| 719 BBC Radio Wales 720 BBC Radio Cymru | |
(p. 54)

text_image
DVB Manual Tuning Frequency [CH2] 474.00 MHz Signal Quality 0 10 Signal Strength 0 10 No. Channel Name Type New Free TV: 0 Pay TV: 0 Data: 0Radio: 0 Stopped(p. 52)

text_image
All DVB Channels ✓ 70 CBBC Channel ✓ 72 Cartoon Nwk ✓ 105 BBCi ○ 719 BBC Radio Wales □ 720 BBC Radio Cymru ○ 1 BBC ONE Wales ✓ 7 BBC THREE(p. 58)
| DVB Favourites Editor | |
| All DVB Channels Favourites1 | |
| 1 BBC One Wales | |
| 7 BBC THREE | |
| 14 E4 | |
| CBBC Channel70 | |
| 72 Cartoon Nwk | |
| 105 BBCi | 8 |
| 719 BBC Radio Wales | |
| 720 BBC Radio Cymru | |
(p. 57)

text_image
Channel Sorting by Region GBR> Best signal quality (All Regions) England Regions> Region choice available(p. 56)

text_image
DVB Auto Setup Progress CH 21:03 This will take about 3 minutes. CH Channel Name Type Quality 62 CBBC Channel Free TV 10 62 BBC Radio Wales Free TV 10 62 E4 Free TV 10 62 10 Cartoon Nwk Free TV Free TV: 4 Pay TV: 0 Data: 0Radio: 0 Searching(p. 53)

text_image
Analogue Manual Tuning 1 BBC1 CH33 Manual Tuning 21 Store -68(p. 59)

text_image
Analogue Auto Setup Scan CH 21:02 This will take about 3 minutes. CH Channel Name 29 30 Analogue: 2 Searching(p. 53)

text_image
Analogue Channel List ✓ 1 BBC1 ☐ 2 ***** ☐ 3 ***** ✓ 4 ***** ✓ 5 ***** ✓ 6 ***** ✓ 7 *****(p. 59)

text_image
Other Satellite Add New Channels - Satellite Selection Satellite Selection Astra2/Eurobird Continue freesat and other channels Signal Quality 0 10 Signal Strength 0 10 Signal Lock Locked(p. 61)

text_image
Other Satellite Manual Tuning Transponder Frequency 10773 Polarisation Horizontal Symbol Rate (Ksym/s) Auto Start Scan(p. 61)

text_image
Other Satellite Auto Setup Satellite Astra 2/Eurobird Progress 0% This may take up to 20 minutes. No. Channel Name Type Quality 1 BBC 1 East (W) Free TV 10 2 BBC 1 CI Free TV 10 3 BBC HD Free TV 10 4 6 Free TV 10 9 Free TV: 4 Pay TV: 0 Radio: 0 Searching(p. 60)

text_image
Display Settings Teletext FASTEXT Teletext Character Set West Preferred Teletext Irish Preferred Subtitles English Input Labels Access Banner Display Timeout 3 seconds On Playing Time Display On Radio Mode Off(p. 46, 47)

text_image
-Available in Analogue Ireland only -Available in DVB Ireland only -Not available in Analogue| Input Labels | |
| AV1 | DVD |
| AV2 | AV2 |
| COMPONENT | COMPONENT |
| HDMI1 | HDMI1 |
| HDMI2 | HDMI2 |
| HDMI3 | HDMI3 |
| HDMI4 | HDMI4 |
| freesat | freesat |
| Satellite | Satellite |
| Input Labels | 2/2 |
| DVB | DVB |
| Analogue | Analogue |
| Other Sat. | Other Sat. |
(p. 66)
Retuning from Setup Menu
Automatically retune the channels received in the area.
• This function is available if channel tuning is already performed.
- Only the selected mode is retuned. All the previous tuning settings are erased.
- If Child Lock PIN number (p. 64) has been set, the PIN number is required.
freesat channels UK only

text_image
INPUT TV MENU EXIT OKTo return to TV
EXIT

1
Select freesat
→ (p. 19)

2
Display the menu
MENU
3
Select [Setup]

text_image
VIEW Main Menu Picture Sound Timer Setup
4
Select [freesat Tuning Menu]

text_image
freesat Tuning Menu s
- The displayed item depends on the selected mode.
For Auto Setup, using the buttons on the side panel of the TV (p. 10)
1 Press repeatedly until [Auto Setup] appears

2 Access [Auto Setup]

3 Start [Auto Setup]


text_image
• To return to
Note
You cannot set the postcode in this operation. The previous postcode setting is not erased.
5
Select [Auto Setup]
Example :

text_image
freesat Tuning Menu Auto Setup
select
access
6
Start Auto Setup (Settings are made automatically)
freesat Auto Setup
All freesat tuning data will be erased



text_image
freesat Auto Setup Searching Signal Quality 0 10 Signal Strength 0 10 IV Channels Found 8 Radio Channels Found 2 Data Channels Found 1 Channels found, creating channel list7
Enter your postcode

text_image
Enter Postcode for local channels including space Postcode A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 1 2 3 7 8 9 B12 10 2027Your postcode is required to receive local services and sort the channel order.
Please ensure to include a space when entering your postcode.
Set characters



(green)
- You can set characters by using numeric buttons.
"Characters table for numeric buttons" (p. 117)
When the operation is completed, the channel at the lowest position will be displayed.

text_image
INPUT TV MENU EXIT OKTo return to TV
EXIT
For Auto Setup, using the buttons on the side panel of the TV (p. 10)
1 Press repeatedly until [Auto Setup] appears

2 Access [Auto Setup]

3 Start [Auto Setup]


• To return to TV

Note
• If tuning has not been done completely
→ [Manual Tuning] (p. 56, 59)
1
Select DVB or Analogue
→ (p. 19)

2
Display the menu
MENU

3
Select [Setup]

text_image
VIETA Main Menu Picture Sound Timer Setup
4
Select [DVB Tuning Menu] or [Analogue Tuning Menu]

text_image
DVB Tuning Menu Access Analogue Tuning Menu Access
- The displayed item depends on the selected mode.
5
Select [Auto Setup]
Example :

text_image
DVB Tuning Menu Auto Setup
6
Start Auto Setup (Settings are made automatically)
Example : DVB



text_image
DVB Auto Setup Progress CH 21:02 This will take about 3 minutes. CH Channel Name Type Quality 62 CBBC Channel Free TV 10 62 BBC Radio Wales Free TV 10 62 E4 Free TV 10 62 10 Cartoon Nwk Free TV Free TV: 4 Pay TV: 0 Data: 0Radio: 0 SearchingExample : Analogue



text_image
Analogue Auto Setup Scan CH 21-09 This will take about 3 minutes. CH Channel Name 29 30 Analogue: 2 Searching- The analogue settings are downloaded to a Q-Link compatible equipment connected to the TV in Analogue mode.
When the operation is completed, the channel at the lowest position will be displayed.
Tuning and Editing Channels
(freesat) UK only
You can retuné channels or make your favourite channel lists, skip unwanted channels, etc.

text_image
1 Select freesat → (p. 19) TV 2 Display the menu MENU 3 Select [Setup] VISTA Main Menu Picture Sound Timer Setup ① select ② access 4 Select [freesat Tuning Menu] #1 select #2 accessFreesat Tuning Menu #s
#1 select #2 access 5 Select one of the following functionsFreesat Tuning Menu
Favourites Edit Access Channel List Access Regional Channel Edit Access Auto Setup Access Signal Condition Accessauto Setup
• "Retuning f (p. 52) To return to TV EXITList favourite freesat channels [Favourites Edit]
Create your favourite channel list from various broadcasters.
The freesat Favourites list is available for switching from [Channel Genre] in the TV Guide screen (p. 23).
1 Select a channel to list (→Encrypted channel)
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - List favourite freesat channels [Favourites Edit] - 1](/content/2026/05/796352/images/4d833dd429a9ab068d96a219277d6bf65d840fafb5b64e3c3700d9bd060f99ae.jpg)
text_image
freesat Favourites Editor freesat Channels Favourites 1 BBC One Wales 7 BBC THREE 14 E4 70 CBBC Channel 72 Cartoon Nwk 105 BBC 719 BBC Radio Wales 720 BBC Radio Cymru select2 Add it to the Favourites list
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - List favourite freesat channels [Favourites Edit] - 2](/content/2026/05/796352/images/d45475bc2691b9b1b843f455034a4974ae1a63a3dd6906fe5b42c7df80c1057e.jpg)
text_image
freesat Favourites Editor freesat Channels 1 BBC One Wales 7 BBC THREE 14 E4 70 CBBC Channel 72 Cartoon Nwk 105 BBCi 719 BBC Radio Wales 720 BBC Radio Cymru Favourites 1 BBC One Wales A channel is added • To add all channels to the list (yellow)■ To edit Favourites list
While the cursor is in the Favourites field to edit
• To delete a channel
• To delete all channels

① select
(yellow)
② delete
• To move the channel
(green)

Select the new position

(五)
Select the turn Store
or


(green)

flowchart
graph TD
A["To name the Favourites (red)"] --> B["Set characters (maximum : ten characters) Store"]
B --> C["Back/RETURN"]
D["3 Store"] --> E["OK"]
style A fill:#000,stroke:#fff,color:#fff
style B fill:#f9f,stroke:#000,color:#fff
style C fill:#ccf,stroke:#000,color:#fff
style D fill:#cfc,stroke:#000,color:#fff
style E fill:#fcc,stroke:#000,color:#fff
Skip unwanted freesat channels [Channel List]
You can hide unwanted freesat channels.
The hidden channels cannot be displayed except in this function. Use this function to skip unwanted channels.
Select a channel and [reveal] / [hide]
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select a channel and [reveal] / [hide] - 1](/content/2026/05/796352/images/82c7fc34927a64fb7756ce77738b88dca8eb0fb386710de4763b7b266aab1de1.jpg)
text_image
freesat Channel List 101 BBC 1 Scotland 102 BBC 2 Scotland 103 stv 104 stv 108 BBC THREE 109 BBC FOUR 110 BBC HD ① select ② [reveal] / [hide] ✓ : [reveal] □ : [hide] (skip)• To reveal all channels (yellow)
Replace the regional channels [Regional Channel Edit]
You can replace some regional channels with the available channels from another region channel. (if available)
1 Select the channel you want to replace

text_image
freesat Regional Channels Editor freesat Regional Channels Alternative Regional Channels 101 BBC 1 London 102 BBC 2 England 101 BBC 1 Scotland 101 BBC 1 Wales 101 BBC 1 East ① select ② set2 Select the channel to be replaced

text_image
freesat Regional Channels Editor freesat Regional Channels Alternative Regional Channels 101 BBC 1 London 102 BBC 2 England 101 BBC 1 Scotland 101 BBC 1 Wales 101 BBC 1 East ① select ② replaceCheck freesat signal [Signal Condition]
Selects a channel and checks the freesat signal condition.
A good Signal Strength is not an indication of best signal for freesat reception.
Please use the Signal Quality indicator as follows :
[Signal Quality] :
- Green bar ➕ Good
- Yellow bar → Poor
- Red bar → Bad (Check the Satellite dish)
Example :

text_image
freesat Signal Condition Channel Name 70 CBBC Channel Signal Quality 0 9 Signal Strength 0 8 Bit Error Rate 0.00E+00 Network Name Wenvoe Frequency 802.00 MHz, 64 QAM, 6840 KS/s• To change the channel

These bars show the maximum signal value of the selected channel.
(DVB)
You can retune channels or make your favourite channel lists, skip unwanted channels, etc.

text_image
1 Select DVB → (p. 19) 2 Display the menu MENU 3 Select [Setup] VISTA Main Menu Picture Sound Timer Setup ① select ② access 4 Select [DVB Tuning Menu] DVB Tuning Menu ① select ② access 5 Select one of the following functions DVB Tuning Menu Favourites Edit Access Channel List Access Auto Setup Access Channel Sorting by Region Access Manual Tuning Access Update Channel List Access New Channel Message On Signal Condition Access OK To return to TV EXIT • [Auto Setup] • “Retuning from Setup Menu” (p. 53)Sort DVB channels according to the region [Channel Sorting by Region] UK only
You can sort DVB channels so that those with the best signal quality, or those for your preferred region, appear nearer the top of your Channel List.
Normally, you should select [Best signal quality (All Regions)].
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Sort DVB channels according to the region [Channel Sorting by Region] UK only - 1](/content/2026/05/796352/images/de8a50e31beea331e4384d880eb3aa3f9ee54089001e328ef4614c7024b887d7.jpg)
text_image
Channel Sorting by Region GBR> Best signal quality (All Regions) England Regions> Region choice available![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Sort DVB channels according to the region [Channel Sorting by Region] UK only - 2](/content/2026/05/796352/images/1cb0a1f670aadba61af3d593ec9b3dcb804a4f611f810ca668e3d2786f7caabc.jpg)
(select repeatedly until you reach the available region)
- If you choose to select your preferred region, you could find channels with a weaker signal appear nearer the top of your Channel List. If you have any image or sound problems, select [Best signal quality (All Regions)] instead.
Set DVB channel manually [Manual Tuning]
Normally use [Auto Setup] or [Update Channel List] to retune DVB channels.
If tuning has not been done completely or for adjusting the direction of the aerial, use this function.
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Set DVB channel manually [Manual Tuning] - 1](/content/2026/05/796352/images/0f9d60d69fe9fb04908343e2c76efcd53fd6ae8c97bed05012274692dc75aead.jpg)
text_image
DVB Manual Tuning Frequency [CH21] 474.00 MHz Signal Quality 0 10 Signal Strength 0 10 No. Channel Name Type New Free TV: 0 Pay TV: 0 Radio: 0 Data: 0 Stopped![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Set DVB channel manually [Manual Tuning] - 2](/content/2026/05/796352/images/aa5500b2bf9b221ce403c5b61860bfd52835b4d7214ef8e4acf3ff09213e8f8c.jpg)
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Set DVB channel manually [Manual Tuning] - 3](/content/2026/05/796352/images/29d40bf8d315ca434a6f17f87f27d8d54ad8583e6e16ecf7f3f96991dbb690e1.jpg)
text_image
Ireland 1 Adjust frequency for each channel ① select channel ② adjust frequency 2 Search- Set where the level of [Signal Quality] becomes the maximum.
List favourite DVB channels [Favourites Edit]
Create your favourite channel lists from various broadcasters (up to 4: [Favourites]1 to 4).
The DVB Favourites lists are available for switching in the Information banner (p. 20) and from [Category] in the TV Guide screen (p. 25).
1 Select a channel to list (○: Encrypted channel)

text_image
DVB Favourites Editor All DVB Channels Favourites1 1 BBC One Wales 7 BBC THREE 14 E4 CBBC Channel70 72 Cartoon Nwk 105 BBC 719 BBC Radio Wales 720 BBC Radio Cymru select To display other Favourites (green)2 Add it to the Favourites list

text_image
DVB Favourites Editor All DVB Channels Favourites1 1 BBC One Wales 7 BBC THREE 14 E4 CBBC Channel70 72 Cartoon Nwk 105 BBC 719 BBC Radio Wales 720 BBC Radio Cymru 1 BBC One Wales • To add all channels to the list (yellow) A channel is added■ To edit Favourites list
While the cursor is in the Favourites field to edit
• To delete a channel
• To delete all channels


• To move the channel

Select the new position Select the turn Store



• To name the Favourites

Set characters (maximum : ten characters) Store

text_image
User input Name A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | : # a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z ( ) + - " _ 1 2 3 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 4 5 6 3 7 8 9 7 8 9 0 0 0 0 0 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2

3 Store
BACK/ RETURN


Note
- Channel position numbers (known as logical channel numbers) can be swapped in Channel List. To swap the channel position number [Channel List] (p. 58)
Check DVB signal [Signal Condition]
Selects a channel and checks the DVB signal condition.
A good Signal Strength is not an indication of best signal for DVB reception.
Please use the Signal Quality indicator as follows :
[Signal Quality] :
- Green bar → Good
- Yellow bar → Poor
- Red bar Bad (Check the Terrestrial aerial)
Example :

text_image
DVB Signal Condition Channel Name 70 CBBC Channel Signal Quality 0 Signal Strength 0 Bit Error Rate 0.00E+00 Network Name Wenvoe Frequency 802.00 MHz, 64 CAM, 69/01 S/s• To change the channel

Display a notification message [New Channel Message]
Selects whether to give a notification message when a new DVB channel is found. [Off] / [On]
New channels found! Press OK to update channel list. Press EXIT to ignore.
- Selecting OK will perform [Update Channel List].
Skip unwanted DVB channels, Edit DVB Channels [Channel List]
You can hide unwanted DVB channels. The hidden channels cannot be displayed except in this function. Use this function to skip unwanted channels.
Select a channel and [reveal] / [hide]
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select a channel and [reveal] / [hide] - 1](/content/2026/05/796352/images/52be7d1a78b84ec850f3f87928314e94e05170580b16d4780690f57710d5eb6f.jpg)
text_image
All DVB Channels ✓ 70 CBBC Channel ✓ 72 Cartoon Nwk ✓ 105 BBCi ○ 719 BBC Radio Wales □ 720 BBC Radio Cymru □ 1 BBC ONE Wales ✓ 7 BBC THREE![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select a channel and [reveal] / [hide] - 2](/content/2026/05/796352/images/0ed389d4cc92bbcb7353a9d2800194c86afa30ac6497d5e16c8dccafce28d00b.jpg)
① select
②[reveal] / [hide]
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select a channel and [reveal] / [hide] - 3](/content/2026/05/796352/images/940fc2051c85cf2772f12017975b5456efbdb81c69e1f5a007958e604e178684.jpg)
: [reveal]
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select a channel and [reveal] / [hide] - 4](/content/2026/05/796352/images/a0a33ef7f9a0eedeed95c2b9a59c95bdf2ff1cdc79dde598bf8db2199e1b4d03.jpg)
: [hide] (skip)
• To reveal all channels
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select a channel and [reveal] / [hide] - 5](/content/2026/05/796352/images/941da2175eada9d36cc9dbf2e66988618c1cd1e2fbe0289365686d77783e1c06.jpg)
(yellow)
To edit channels
You can also edit each channel in Channel List.
• To retune each channel
[Manual Tuning] (p. 56)
(only for the revealed channels)
Channel position number

text_image
1 BBC ONE WALES Coronation Street 20:00 - 20:55 Now Info 20:35 All DVB Channels Select favourites
• To swap the channel position number (logical channel number)


Enter the new position number



(green)
Update DVB channel automatically [Update Channel List]
You can add new channels, delete removed channels, update channel name and position automatically to Channel List.
Example : UK
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Update DVB channel automatically [Update Channel List] - 1](/content/2026/05/796352/images/b8d067a891e2dd409d8284b5fddb628e1c48b7597140d9f333289f46458495d7.jpg)
text_image
DVB Update Channel List Progress CH 21:00 This will take about 3 minutes. CH Channel Name Type Quality FreEBMol0/Pay TV: 0 Data: 0 Searching- Channel List is updated while keeping your settings in [Favourites Edit], [Channel List], [Child Lock], [Timer Programming], etc.
- Depending on the signal condition, the update may not work properly.
(Analogue)
You can retune channels or skip unwanted channels, edit channels etc.

text_image
INPUT TV MENU EXIT OK BACK/ RETURN 1 2 3 1 2 abc 3 def 4 ghi 5 jkl 6 mno 7 pqrs 8 tuv 9 wyz 0 ^ V ■ To return to TV EXITSelect Analogue


Display the menu
MENU

Select [Setup]
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [Setup] - 1](/content/2026/05/796352/images/7017f15d703f6601807431ead4ed08299fe77a7305d69ec697d06d19e29b27dc.jpg)
text_image
VIEA Main Menu Picture Sound Timer Setup![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [Setup] - 2](/content/2026/05/796352/images/918f906ca185f3314f31c537ffe6044656ba4fa11d45997a3d4bfce3d19cc1f1.jpg)
① select
②access
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [Setup] - 3](/content/2026/05/796352/images/409324bb84bb5c4506cceca22122891e5999d40ccde5249857c309dc52ee99c7.jpg)
Select [Analogue Tuning Menu]
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [Analogue Tuning Menu] - 1](/content/2026/05/796352/images/9617f349ccd62985349110b4a5ff869a424ee70e83761ad0a1b286ef884cdf23.jpg)
text_image
Analogue Tuning Menu Access![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [Analogue Tuning Menu] - 2](/content/2026/05/796352/images/9ae4b6741ca142884655e99a97ae4d58ca487e67992adeabc719c6e5157fe71f.jpg)
① select
②access
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [Analogue Tuning Menu] - 3](/content/2026/05/796352/images/f0f51f7001cd85000aa9dbe5d50cf6fdc6188db5e45ad5abc7f4bed4707e18ae.jpg)
Select one of the following functions
| Analogue Tuning Menu | |
| Channel List | Access |
| Auto Setup | Access |
| Manual Tuning | Access |

① select
②access
• [Auto Setup]
→ "Retuning from Setup Menu" (p. 53)
Skip unwanted Analogue channels, Edit Analogue channels [Channel List]
You can hide unwanted Analogue channels.
The hidden channels cannot be displayed except in this function. Use this function to skip unwanted channels.
Select a channel and [reveal] / [hide]
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Skip unwanted Analogue channels, Edit Analogue channels [Channel List] - 1](/content/2026/05/796352/images/852ffe552b2a8d7a060e7b1176690a13e3b58660c1c5461a000e3b196b3785c3.jpg)
text_image
Analogue Channel List ✓ 1 BBC1 ○ 2 ***** ○ 3 ***** ✓ 4 ***** ✓ 5 ***** ✓ 6 ***** ✓ 7 *****![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Skip unwanted Analogue channels, Edit Analogue channels [Channel List] - 2](/content/2026/05/796352/images/054d4d32dada1352fa0824aa5bf31462fdd33ee83f106ed8713e9602805d1f65.jpg)
text_image
① select ② [reveal] / [hide] ✓ : [reveal] □ : [hide] (skip)• To reveal all channels (yellow)
■ To edit channels
You can also edit each channel in Channel List.
• To retune each channel ([Manual Tuning]) (see below)
• To move the channel position



Store

• To rename the channel name

(blue)

Set characters (maximum : five characters) Store

text_image
Edit channel name Name A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 + r a b c d e f g h i j k l n o p q r s t u v w y z ( ) + - *
• To use numeric buttons
"Characters table for numeric buttons" (p. 117)



text_image
Channel position Channel name 1 ITV CH23 All Analogue Channels 23:35Note
- If a VCR is connected only with the RF cable, edit [VCR].
Set Analogue channel manually [Manual Tuning]
[Fine Tuning] Ireland only
Use to make small adjustments to the tuning of an individual programme (affected by weather conditions, etc.)
[Manual Tuning]
Set Analogue channel manually after Auto Setup.
- If a VCR is connected only with the RF cable, it is recommended to select channel position [0].
Example : Ireland
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - [Manual Tuning] - 1](/content/2026/05/796352/images/8abbaf2667ad07c489805a6876a84b347c6da738345422b212a0dd07d0111130.jpg)
text_image
Analogue Manual Tuning 1 BBC1 Fine Tuning Manual Tuning CH33 CH 1 99 H: 21 41 Store1 Select the channel position
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - [Manual Tuning] - 2](/content/2026/05/796352/images/71452fe2f203fe9b8481a20264bc3bddb555f1f271b4f3406da5d4ed4af882db.jpg)
2 Select the channel
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - [Manual Tuning] - 3](/content/2026/05/796352/images/8a99a5049418ae4c233b2665fc097a88ce892f6e130f41878f1e09afe60aeecb.jpg)
3 Search
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - [Manual Tuning] - 4](/content/2026/05/796352/images/244460bae69b07e8c32a42af5dbe4473357e448e2ce0a994f0bbe331aa171ea9.jpg)
4 Select [Store]
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - [Manual Tuning] - 5](/content/2026/05/796352/images/fae5e1658369bb25b112de1849abdb170797b2b73e5190f5ff922844917f6e55.jpg)
(Other Sat.) UK (Satellite) Ireland
You can tune all receivable digital satellite channels and create your channel list, etc.
- Some of Other Sat. / Satellite functions may work to differing specifications (depending on the broadcasters).

text_image
1 Select freesat or Other Sat. UK Satellite (p. 19) TV 2 Display the menu MENU 3 Select [Setup] VIEFA Main Menu Picture Sound Timer Setup ① select ② access 4 Select [Other Sat. Tuning Menu] UK Select [Satellite Tuning Menu] Ireland Other Sat. Tuning Menu Access ① select ② access 5 Select one of the following functions Other Satellite Tuning Menu Access Channel List Access Auto Setup Access Manual Tuning Access Add New Channels Access Signal Condition Access ① access / storeSet all receivable digital satellite channels [Auto Setup]
Any receivable digital compliant satellite channels can be tuned.
- Only Other Sat. / Satellite channels are tuned or retuned.
- All the previous tuning settings are erased.
- If a Child Lock PIN number (p. 64) has been set, it must be entered.
1 Select the satellite and then select [Start]
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select the satellite and then select [Start] - 1](/content/2026/05/796352/images/333a795dcb4acec619aba06090031b42752956ca14dd1582e64282047ffa42db.jpg)
text_image
Other Satellite Auto Setup - Satellite Selection Satellite Selection Eurobird Start freesat and other channels![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select the satellite and then select [Start] - 2](/content/2026/05/796352/images/61c2f68bd432af83e47eee9cfd5719f079a14f0aee6e888618c7c98990ece34d.jpg)
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select the satellite and then select [Start] - 3](/content/2026/05/796352/images/064f668c611a54a5642d95bd9977a6c0aebbbb0405de7e10c9b6de03d4e084fd.jpg)
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select the satellite and then select [Start] - 4](/content/2026/05/796352/images/41045eec0604fecbd6cda75b31e758a41c4dc93be2734836591ffe33c5f9903b.jpg)
① select
② Start
- Selectable satellites are Astra2/Eurobird, Astra1 and Hotbird.
- If you want to tune from all available satellites, select [Any Satellite].
2 Check the signal condition and the message

text_image
Other Satellite Add New Channels - Satellite Selection Satellite Selection Astra2/Eurobird Continue freesat and other channels Signal Quality 0 10 Signal Strength 0 10 Signal Lock Locked



If you select [Any Satellite], this step is skipped.
- It takes a while to check the connection for your selected satellite.
- Ensure that the Signal Lock status is shown as "Locked". If it is not locked, the search cannot be executed.
- If the status is shown as "Not locked" and Signal Quality / Signal Strength have no indications, please check the dish alignment.
If the status is shown as "Not locked" but there are some levels of Signal Quality / Signal Strength indicated, select [Any Satellite] in Satellite Selection and try again.
3 Select the search mode and start Auto Setup (Settings are made automatically)



text_image
Other Satellite Auto Setup Satellite Astra 2/Eurobird Progress 0% 100% This may take up to 20 minutes. No. Channel Name Type Quality 1 BBC 1 East (W) Free TV 10 2 BBC 1 CI Free TV 10 3 BBC HD Free TV 10 4 | Free TV 1 Free TV: 4 Pay TV: 0 Radio: 0 Searching- If you select [Astra2/Eurobird] or [Any Satellite], freesat channels will also be searched.
0

When the operation is completed, the channel at the lowest position will be displayed.
Add Other Sat. / Satellite channels automatically [Add New Channels]
You can add any new channels found automatically to Channel List.
1 Check the signal condition

text_image
Other Satellite Add New Channels - Satellite Selection Satellite Selection Astra2/Eurobird Start freesat and other channels Signal Quality 0 10 Signal Strength 0 10 Signal Lock Locked
If you selected [Any Satellite] in Auto Setup, this step is skipped.
- It takes a while to check the connection for your selected satellite.
- Ensure that the Signal Lock status is shown as "Locked". If it is not locked, the search cannot be executed.
- If the status is shown as "Not locked" and Signal Quality / Signal Strength have no indications, please check the dish alignment.
2 Select the search mode and start Add New Channels



text_image
Other Satellite Add New Channels Satellite Astra2/Eurobird Progress 0% 100% This may take up to 20 minutes. No. Channel Name Type Quality Free TV: 0 Pay TV: 0 Radio: 0 Searching- New channels can only be added to the existing Channel List from the same satellite.

List favourite Other Sat. / Satellite channels [Favourites Edit]
Create your favourite channel lists from various broadcasters (up to 4: [Favourites]1 to 4).
The Other Sat. / Satellite Favourites lists are available for switching in the Information banner (p. 20)
• To create the Other Sat. / Satellite Favourites list, refer to “List favourite DVB channels” → (p. 57)
Create the channel list of Other Sat. / Satellite [Channel List]
Create your channel list of Other Sat. / Satellite for viewing from all the found channels to exclude the duplicated channels or to reduce the number of channels. And then you can select your desired channels easily.
1 Select a channel to list in [Channels for Viewing]
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select a channel to list in [Channels for Viewing] - 1](/content/2026/05/796352/images/93814551271f9e298ed9c45b3486f1a8d58c48200d6522afc651a3cd5a782112.jpg)
text_image
Other Satellite Channel List Editor Channels Found - All Channels for Viewing BBC One Wales BBC THREE E4 CBBC Channel Cartoon Nwk BBCi BBC Radio Wales BBC Radio Cymru select To change the category (red)2 Add it to the Favourites list

text_image
Other Satellite Channel List Editor Channels Found - All Channels for Viewing BBC THREE E4 CBCB Channel Cartoon Nwk BBCi BBC Radio Wales BBC Radio Cymru 1 BBC One Wales BBC One Wales A channel is added- To add continuous block of channels to the list at once

(yellow)



make the block

add
• To delete the selected channel from the list of [Channels Found]

(green)
- To exclude the selected - To move the selected channel in the list of [Channels for Viewing]


flowchart
graph LR
A["(green)"] --> B["Select the new position"]
B --> C["or"]
C --> D["Select the turn"]
D --> E["Store (green)"]
Set Other Sat. / Satellite channel manually [Manual Tuning]
Normally use [Auto Setup] or [Add New Channels] to tune Other Sat. / Satellite channels.
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Set Other Sat. / Satellite channel manually [Manual Tuning] - 1](/content/2026/05/796352/images/04a3a71d662376b5330bdbd6834943f6a038863a6305d2b3c4dc2b779a0fd6c6.jpg)
text_image
Other Satellite Manual Tuning Transponder Frequency 10773 Polarisation Horizontal Symbol Rate (Ksym/s) Auto Start Scan- Set tuning parameters for the required satellite, details can usually be found in a satellite TV magazine.
Timer Programming
Timer Programming from Menu
The Timer Programming menu allows you to choose programmes that you wish to remind watching or record to the external recorder, the USB HDD or the SD Card. At the correct time, the TV will tune to the correct channel automatically to record even if the TV is in Standby mode.
TV Guide may also be used to set timer programming event (p. 26).
- Timer Programming can store up to 15 events.
- For recording using Timer Programming, the TV must be either On or in standby. For reminders to be displayed, the TV must be On.
- No other channel can be selected while the recording of Timer Programming is in progress.
- It may not be possible to record an encrypted programme (which is copy-protected).
- When recording programmes to the external recorder, be sure to make the proper settings on the recorder connected to the TV.
If a compatible recorder with Q-Link or similar technologies is connected to the TV (p. 104) and the [Link Settings] (p. 45) are correct, no setting of the recorder is required. Also read the manual of the recorder.
- If the recorder is not compatible with Q-Link or similar technologies, set the timer of the recorder in addition to the Timer Programming on the TV. For preparations of a recorder, read the manual of the recorder.
- For more information of the USB HDD / SD Card Recording. (p. 74, 116)
- Recordings to the external recorders are always in standard definition composite video via SCART, even if the original programme is in high definition.

flowchart
graph TD
A["1 Select the tuner you want to use (p. 19)"] --> B["2 Display the menu"]
B --> C["3 Select [Timer"]]
C --> D["4 Select [Timer Programming"]]
D --> E["4 Select [Timer Programming"]]
Note
- Check that the LED is orange. If not, timer programmes are not active or not stored.
- Timer Programming reminder messages will remain displayed until one of the following occurs :
- You press the OK button to view the programme or the EXIT button to cancel the reminder.
- The timer programming event that the reminder is set for ends.
- “!” identifies that any timer programming events have overlapped. [Ext Rec.], [USB HDD Rec.] and [SD Card Rec.] are given priority over [Reminder]. As for the overlapped two or more [Ext Rec.] / [USB HDD Rec.] / [SD Card Rec.], the first timer programming event starts and finishes as programmed. The next timer programming event can then start.
- 2 minutes before the starting time, a reminder message appears if you are watching TV.
• To remove the message and start the programme

• To cancel the Timer Programming

- The recording of Timer Programming will automatically change to the programmed channel a few seconds before the start time.
• To stop recording of the timer programming event, it may be necessary to stop the recorder manually. - The recording of Timer Programming will be performed even if the TV is in Rewind LIVE TV recording (p. 78) or Pause Live TV recording (p. 107). In this case, these recordings will be cancelled.
Set timer programming event details [Timer Programming]
1 Start making the settings

2 Select the function ([Ext Rec.], [USB HDD Rec.], [SD Card Rec.] or [Reminder])
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select the function ([Ext Rec.], [USB HDD Rec.], [SD Card Rec.] or [Reminder]) - 1](/content/2026/05/796352/images/ee491fb80a2234688c039cef9770c30cd8006bf0e44fc620bcdbc2c4b3ac3063.jpg)
[Ext Rec.] / [USB HDD Rec.] / [SD Card Rec.]
to record the programme to the external recorder, the USB HDD or the SD Card
When the start time comes, the channel will be switched automatically and the video and audio signals will be output.
2 minutes before the starting time, a reminder message appears if you are watching TV.
For [USB HDD Rec.] and [SD Card Rec.], you can select a recording mode :
[DR] : Direct recording (normal mode)
[LT1] : Long time recording
[LT2] : Extra long time recording
“Recording time for the USB HDD / SD Card Recording” (p. 116)
[Reminder]
to remind you to watch the programme
When you are watching TV, a reminder message appears 2 minutes before the start time.
Press the OK button to switch to the programmed channel.
3 Set the channel, date and time (repeat the operations as below)
Set items in the order of 1 to 4. Store

select the item


set
• 1, 3 and 4 can also be entered with numeric buttons.



: Displayed if the timer programming events are overlapped
Timer programming - Programmes according to the time setting

text_image
Timer Programming Function No. Date Start End 72 BBC 2W 20:00 21:30- You cannot change the mode within the menu.
UK only
Guide : Guide link programming - Programmes according to the TV Guide signal (p. 27)
S/P : Split Programme programming (p. 27)
• These functions are not available in Analogue mode or Other Sat. mode.
Guide link programming is Timer Programming which is controlled by information from the TV Guide; if programme start and end times are changed by the broadcaster, the timer programming event will follow the change.
A Split Programme programming is a Guide link programming which is interrupted by one or more other programmes.
Note that Guide link programming (including Split Programme programming) only works reliably if correct information is received from broadcasters.
■ To change a timer programming event
Select the programme to be changed Select the programme to be deleted

①select
(No text)
②access

Correct as necessary (as above)
■ To cancel a timer programming event


(red)


■ To record with subtitles (if available)
Select the programme to record with subtitles Select the programme to be cancelled


(yellow)
• Each time pressed :
auto ←→ off cancel
stop cancelling
■ To cancel a timer programming event temporarily


(blue)
• Each time pressed :

■ To view details of the programming (only for Guide link programming) UK only
Select the programme to be viewed



- Press again to return to Timer Programming menu.
Child Lock
You can lock specific channels / AV input terminals and control who watches them.
When the locked channel / input is selected, a message appears; by entering the PIN number, you can watch it.

text_image
MENU EXIT OK 1 2 abc 3 def 4 ghi 5 jkl 6 mno 7 pqrs 8 tuv 9 wxyz 01
Display the menu

2
Select [Setup]

text_image
VIEA Main Menu Picture Sound Timer Setup
① select
② access
3
Select [Child Lock]

text_image
Child Lock Access
① select
② access
Control channel audience [Child Lock]
1 Enter the PIN number (4 digits)

text_image
Child Lock-PIN Entry Please enter new PIN PIN * * * *- Enter the PIN number twice at first setting.
- Make a note of the PIN number in case you forget it.
2 Select [Child Lock List]
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [Child Lock List] - 1](/content/2026/05/796352/images/18676aabcf960194f2a20b3d76482d7d02f0fbbd824a4f015eb4a3f5e961d6c1.jpg)
text_image
Child Lock Change PIN Child Lock List Access ① select ② access3 Select the channel / input to be locked

text_image
Child Lock List - TV and AV Name Input Type Lock 101 BBC 1 Wales DVB Free TV # 7 BBC THREE DVB Free TV # 14 E4C DVB Free TV VCR Analogue Analogue 1 BBC1 Analogue Analogue 2 **** Analogue Analogue AV1 External AV AV2 External AV ① select ② lock: Appears when the channel / input is locked



- To cancel

text_image
Select the locked channel / input- In freesat mode, additional lock items will appear. UK only
[freesat Adult Channels] : Select "Hide" to hide channels of the adult genre in TV Guide and Channel List. All the Timer Programming events of the adult genre will be cancelled.
[freesat Players] : Locks freesat content supplied through the internet.
Unlock : With this setting selected, you will not be required to enter your 4 digit child lock PIN when viewing freesat Player content. This is the default setting.
Lock Guidance Content: With this setting selected, you will be asked to enter your 4 digit child lock PIN whenever you wish to watch freesat Player content which is signalled as "Guidance" (i.e. originally broadcast post watershed).
Lock All Content : With this setting selected, you will be required to enter your 4 digit child lock PIN every time you wish to watch freesat Player content.
■ To change the PIN number
1. Select [Change PIN]
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [Change PIN] - 1](/content/2026/05/796352/images/5565aec48a08bb7cba1a5c13c6aef1f5fbcfe90410e044cda1c4e2a9dd04328d.jpg)
text_image
Child Lock Change PIN Access Child Lock List ① select OK ② access2. Enter a new PIN number twice

text_image
1 2.00 3.00 4.70 5.10 6.00 7.00 8.10 9.00 9■ To set Parental Rating and only
If the DVB programme has the rated information for over the selected age, you have to enter the PIN number to watch (depending on the broadcaster).
Select [Parental Rating] and set an age for the restriction of programmes.

text_image
Child Lock Change PIN Child Lock List Parental Rating No limit select access / storeNote
- Setting [Shipping Condition] (p. 67) erases the PIN number and all settings.
Input Labels
For easier identification and selection of the input mode, you can label each input mode or skip terminals that are not connected to any equipment.
• To select the input mode→(p. 31)


The labels you set will be displayed in the [Input Selection] menu (p. 31), [TV Selection] menu (p. 19) or banner.
- If [Skip] is selected, the input will not be displayed in the [Input Selection] menu and you cannot select the mode.
■ User input
You can name each input mode yourself.
1 Select [User input]

2 Set characters (maximum : ten characters)

text_image
User input Name A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 :# a b c d e f g h -j -k -l m:n-o-p-q r s:l u V W X y z ( ) + - . ."_ 1 2 3#x#y#
4 6 8#x#
7 8 90x#y#
1# 0
3 Store


• To use numeric buttons
"Characters table for numeric buttons" (p. 117)
Shipping Condition
Resets the TV to its original condition with no channels tuned in.
All settings other than [Owner ID] and [USB HDD Setup] are reset (channels, picture, sound settings, etc.).
- To retune TV channels only, e.g. after moving house → "Retuning from Setup Menu" (p. 52, 53)

1 Display the menu
MENU
2 Select [Setup]
3 Select [System Menu]
4 Select [Shipping Condition]
Restore Settings [Shipping Condition]
1 Check the message and initialise 2 Follow the on screen

flowchart
graph TD
A["Shipping Condition"] --> B["All tuning data will be erased"]
B --> C{Are you sure?}
C --> D["1 (OK)"]
C --> E["2 (OK)"]
C --> F["3 (OK)"]
D --> G["(Confirm)"]
E --> H["(Confirm)"]
F --> I["(Start [Shipping Condition"])]
instructions
Reset to Factory Shipping Condition Completed.
Please switch off TV.
• [Auto Setup] will automatically start when Mains power On / Off switch is next turned On. (p. 13)
Owner ID
Entry of the PIN number and personal information (your name, address and postcode). In the unfortunate event of theft, the Owner ID will help the Police to determine the owner.

text_image
MENU EXIT 1 Display the menu MENU 2 Select [Setup] VIERA Main Menu Picture Sound Timer Setup 3 Select [System Menu] Access 4 Select [Owner ID] System Menu Access 1 select 2 access 1 select 2 access 1 select 2 accessInput owner ID [Owner ID]
1 Enter the PIN number (4 digits)
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Input owner ID [Owner ID] - 1](/content/2026/05/796352/images/0ecab412c4331210bd073c17ceee550df1e645956942af27a0ce4933a91f3e10.jpg)
text_image
Owner ID Please enter new PIN PIN * * * *![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Input owner ID [Owner ID] - 2](/content/2026/05/796352/images/fe4b69d2c70eb36c247fc6d9ed21d9c0a90ddfa06b6a066bf39bbbcd83f26720.jpg)
- Enter the PIN number twice at first setting.
• Make a note of the PIN number in case you forget it. The PIN number cannot be reset.
2 Select the item (NAME / HOUSE NO / POSTCODE) and set characters
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Input owner ID [Owner ID] - 3](/content/2026/05/796352/images/d88691dcdbe4e847a0cc521dc6470bc069e69da2c0fd40ad9da50b3704605f75.jpg)
text_image
Owner ID-Data Entry PIN * * * * NAME HOUSE NO POSTCODE![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Input owner ID [Owner ID] - 4](/content/2026/05/796352/images/537ef83aadb1344e76c2160f3647bd74477e615d6ce71e271edcd69eeb1d4d11.jpg)
text_image
User input NAME A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 i . μ a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z ( ) * - . * _![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Input owner ID [Owner ID] - 5](/content/2026/05/796352/images/47432fc5f69556033dcf343d8794bcab0f541904fba1b98fd2d6e2379edaad1d.jpg)
text_image
Return to select other items BACK/ RETURN![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Input owner ID [Owner ID] - 6](/content/2026/05/796352/images/ac245319ee63126881e60507cd0649d2e7b33d6c276042d831f6199490ae1377.jpg)
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Input owner ID [Owner ID] - 7](/content/2026/05/796352/images/b044509416e4b6d7d874494ea770d8f19582cded3d9d2c502c4c85f6fda11211.jpg)
- Select the next item and repeat the operations.
• To use numeric buttons
“Characters table for numeric buttons” (p. 117)
3 Exit the menu
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Input owner ID [Owner ID] - 8](/content/2026/05/796352/images/5904a94b3dce0989ec4a307bb4caf7836657ae60097f4973ac02c5b54018755a.jpg)
To check the personal information stored
Hold down for about 5 seconds



text_image
Owner ID NAME * * * * * HOUSE NO * * * * * POSTCODE * * * * * * EXIT
natural_image
Exterior view of a modern office building (no signage)• The PIN number is not displayed.
■ To change the PIN number
- Select [PIN] 2. Enter a new PIN number twice

text_image
Owner ID-Data Entry PIN * * * * NAME HOUSE NO POSTCODE

Using Common Interface
The Common Interface Module menu provides access to software contained on Common Interface (CI) Modules. This TV works only for Pay TV modules complying with CI standard.
- This function is not available for BskyB's Sky channels.
• Video and audio signals may not be output depending on broadcasts or services.
Caution
- Turn Off Mains power On / Off switch whenever inserting or removing the CI module.
- If a viewing card and a card reader come as a set, first insert the card reader, then insert the viewing card into the card reader.
- Insert the module in the correct direction.

text_image
CI slot Insert or remove straightly and completely CI module Side of the TVInsert the CI module (optional)
• The features that appear on screen are dependent on the contents of the selected CI module.
- Follow the instructions that came with the viewing card to tune in the encrypted channels. If encrypted channels do not appear, perform the below to verify the card is recognised by the TV.
- For more details, see the manual of the CI module, or check with the broadcaster.

text_image
1 Select DVB or Other Sat. uK Satellite Ireland 2 Display the menu 3 Select [Setup] VIEFA Main Menu Picture Sound Timer Setup ① select ② access1 Select DVB or Other Sat. UK Satellite → (p. 19)
2 Display the menu
3 Select [Setup]

text_image
VISA Main Menu Picture Sound Timer Setup
4 Select [System Menu]

text_image
Access
5 Select [Common Interface]

text_image
System Menu USB Keyboard Layout English(UK) Shipping Condition Owner ID Common Interface Access System Update Software Licence System Information
6 Access Common Interface


■ How to operate services by following the on screen operation guide
(Check the instructions provided with the CI module.)
Example :
- Select, go

- Symbol :◀▶▼▲

- Coloured characters
Coloured button
- On screen operation guide may not correspond to the remote control buttons.
Updating the TV Software
From time to time, a new version of software may become available for download to enhance the performance or operations of the TV.
In DVB mode, a notification banner will appear when one of the BBC channels is turned to if a new available software is found.
• To download
• If you choose not to download


You can update any new software automatically or manually.

flowchart
graph TD
A["To return to TV EXIT"] --> B["1 Display the menu MENU"]
B --> C["2 Select [Setup"]]
C --> D["3 Select [System Menu"]]
D --> E["4 Select [System Update"]]
E --> F["① select"]
E --> G["② access"]
Update TV's software system [System Update]
■ To update automatically
Select [Auto Update Search in Standby] and set to [On]


select access / store
If System Update is performed, the software will be updated (it may change TV functions).
If you do not wish to do so, set [Auto Update Search in Standby] to [Off]. The notification banner will keep appearing during the period of new software availability, usually 2 to 3 days.
• Automatically performs a search in standby and downloads an update, if any software updates are available.
- The automatic updating is performed at night under the following conditions :
- Standby
(TV turned Off with the remote control)
- Recording of Timer Programming, Direct TV Recording or One Touch Recording is not in progress.
■ To update immediately
1 Select [System Update Search Now]
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [System Update Search Now] - 1](/content/2026/05/796352/images/48a82794c0a83771b7169df76e8dee1a957e671c9021a97efef0abd0a4d4e561.jpg)
text_image
System Update Auto Update Search in Standby Off System Update Search Now Access![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [System Update Search Now] - 2](/content/2026/05/796352/images/1fad8d6dabaca54f787c3c12627e289263583c85159ed838236d8a39f91d7601.jpg)
2 Searches for an update (for several minutes) and displays a corresponding message if any
3 Download

Note
- Download may take up to 60 minutes.
- During software download and update, DO NOT perform any operations on the TV or switch Off the TV.
Multi Window
Enjoy viewing the digital TV programme and external input (AV, COMPONENT or HDMI) at once.

natural_image
Front view of a gray remote control with buttons and a central 'OK' button (no text or symbols beyond the 'OK')1
Display the menu

2
Select [Picture]
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [Picture] - 1](/content/2026/05/796352/images/7846db95d1196183361e6db7fb42af05c658fd05bbd28030e7837e4775b4f3a7.jpg)
text_image
V1Main Menu Picture Sound Timer Setup![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [Picture] - 2](/content/2026/05/796352/images/0728422ddc4241eb4bbfe901a309e522b3fb72a44ec78e29043424ed40d21a94.jpg)
① select
②access
3
Select [Picture in Picture]
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [Picture in Picture] - 1](/content/2026/05/796352/images/a7781122877b32c6090e3e1a4962e1cab13fc8842ae29bb15133193c163b52d3.jpg)
text_image
Picture in Picture![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [Picture in Picture] - 2](/content/2026/05/796352/images/eacf2de6e2d09e7ce5ab37ef6265e1517f5766a6164cd5ecbfe2c96dd8e59922.jpg)
① select
②access
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [Picture in Picture] - 3](/content/2026/05/796352/images/f56b67d74f6842b1be8e24da0fd07f9efb8580fd2676af270f3af67e091ad94f.jpg)
text_image
1 DVS EXIT PandP Swap- Remote control operations apply to the main screen.
Main screen
Sub screen
■ How to operate in multi window
Display the colour bar if it is not displayed
Picture-in-Picture mode [PinP]
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Picture-in-Picture mode [PinP] - 1](/content/2026/05/796352/images/6f850523fd0cc0980abdf30992a9734613dc726a486816a488f647d447808df0.jpg)
Picture-and-Picture mode [PandP]
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Picture-and-Picture mode [PandP] - 1](/content/2026/05/796352/images/f2dbe8c5693dd260082f0708292d2cfdf59158ad2c8620922f3e17cce1e38b95.jpg)
text_image
1 DVB A AVI PandP Sves Exit B![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Picture-and-Picture mode [PandP] - 2](/content/2026/05/796352/images/671f9757f450b042d16313ce7323c6ae30bed915f09323ce8e18c03a1d638492.jpg)
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Picture-and-Picture mode [PandP] - 3](/content/2026/05/796352/images/94af5286e50d907b855eaeaa38da46c94792371362ad7ae717a947f2e3659510.jpg)
text_image
B Pard? Sve [OK]Colour bar
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Picture-and-Picture mode [PandP] - 4](/content/2026/05/796352/images/a0a9311fa52c3a9fda5b3b69c9f7eb90a2df2f0a0e6d959f3c98a8928d818804.jpg)
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Picture-and-Picture mode [PandP] - 5](/content/2026/05/796352/images/5ea9da48c2877f06f3493fc04d3392bd5ac7c1f61a726634033a91b356c35e94.jpg)
text_image
DV3 AV1 A B EXIT PinP Swaps• To exit multi window
(red)
• To change the input mode or channel of sub screen
1 Swap sub screen for main screen
(blue)
2 Change the input mode 3 Swap again or channel by the (blue) remote control (p. 19, 31)
Note
• Each input mode can only be displayed either on main screen or sub screen.
- The sound comes from only the main screen in multi window.
- You cannot change the aspect ratio in multi window.
• HDMI is available only for main screen.
• Some signals are reformatted for suitable viewing on your display.
- If main screen has digital teletext signals, some key words may appear on the colour bar. In this case the operations can be performed by using colour buttons on the remote control except when the colour bar is displayed by pressing the i button.
Advanced Picture Settings
You can adjust and setup the detailed picture settings for each Viewing Mode.
• To use this function completely, set [Advance(isfccc)] to [On] in the Setup Menu. (p. 47)

text_image
INPUT TV AV MENU EXIT OK 1 2 abc 3 def 4 ghi 5 jkl 6 mno 7 pqrs 8 tuv 9 wqz 0To return to TV
EXIT
1
Select the input mode to adjust and setup
→(p. 19, 31)

2
Display the menu

3
Select [Picture]
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [Picture] - 1](/content/2026/05/796352/images/2fbc96ec650e946d9d707090eaa8a5a85b69e8d8594fdda789cb911e998998dc.jpg)
text_image
V1Main Menu Picture Sound Timer Setup![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [Picture] - 2](/content/2026/05/796352/images/ea6d9ab3beec105db1ca177ecb878d9d6dd8049566afbdcec1d2abdeb8e9893f.jpg)
4
Select [Viewing Mode] and set the mode
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [Viewing Mode] and set the mode - 1](/content/2026/05/796352/images/3fa52b5a6d2e84cca88fdcb0db6404df92648c9f5687c702c43429bd37af0be1.jpg)
text_image
Dynamic Normal Cinema True Cinema Professional1 Professional2 Viewing Mode![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [Viewing Mode] and set the mode - 2](/content/2026/05/796352/images/789d78d9f067d6a3dc480673f9cf18cf21c676915041b8cb13f196b66fe0b7d4.jpg)
select
access / store
5
Select one of the following functions

text_image
Advanced Settings Lock Settings Copy Adjustment Reset to Defaults 2/2 Access Access Reset
① select
② access
- [Copy Adjustment] is available when [Viewing Mode] in the Picture Menu is set to [Professional1] or [Professional2].
Adjust the detailed picture settings [Advanced Settings]
| Advanced Settings | |
| White Balance | Access |
| Colour Management | Access |
| Gamma | Access |
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Adjust the detailed picture settings [Advanced Settings] - 1](/content/2026/05/796352/images/1a501491e4af4ac13957848598049b38a970a68640575519f72b1c2115503023.jpg)
select
adjust
access / store
| Menu | Item | Adjustments / Configurations (alternatives) | ||
| Picture | Advanced Settings | White Balance | R-Gain | Adjusts the white balance of bright red area |
| G-Gain | Adjusts the white balance of bright green area | |||
| B-Gain | Adjusts the white balance of bright blue area | |||
| R-Cutoff | Adjusts the white balance of dark red area | |||
| G-Cutoff | Adjusts the white balance of dark green area | |||
| B-Cutoff | Adjusts the white balance of dark blue area | |||
| More Detailed Adjustment | Adjusts more detailed White Balance items[Input Signal Level] : Adjusts the input signal level[R-Gain] / [G-Gain] / [B-Gain] :Adjusts the detailed white balance of bright red, green or blue area[Reset to Defaults] :Press the OK button to reset to the default detailed White Balance | |||
| Reset to Defaults | Press the OK button to reset to the default White Balance | |||
| Menu | Item Adjustments / Configurations (alternatives) | ||
| Picture | Advanced Settings | Colour Management | R-Hue Adjusts the picture hue of red area |
| G-Hue Adjusts the picture hue of green area | |||
| B-Hue Adjusts the picture hue of blue area | |||
| R-Saturation Adjusts the saturation of red area | |||
| G-Saturation Adjusts the saturation of green area | |||
| B-Saturation Adjusts the saturation of blue area | |||
| R-Luminance Adjusts the luminance of red area | |||
| G-Luminance Adjusts the luminance of green area | |||
| B-Luminance Adjusts the luminance of blue area | |||
| More Detailed Adjustment | |||
| Reset to Defaults | |||
| Reset to Defaults | |||
| Gamma | Switches the gamma curve [S Curve] / [1.8] / [2.0] / [2.2] / [2.4] / [2.6]Please note the numerical values are reference for the adjustment. | ||
| More Detailed Adjustment | |||
| Reset to Defaults | |||
- [Colour Management] is available when [Viewing Mode] in the Picture Menu is set to [Professional1] or [Professional2].
Lock the picture setting [Lock Settings]
Advanced Settings can be locked for each Viewing Mode.
Additionally, [Contrast], [Brightness], [Colour], [Sharpness], [Tint] and [Reset to Defaults] in the Picture Menu can be locked for [Professional1] and [Professional2].
[Professional1] and [Professional2] can be locked for each input.
1 Enter the PIN number (4 digits)
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Lock the picture setting [Lock Settings] - 1](/content/2026/05/796352/images/c97a9cda94b22b27d80f1881f5754fa6fc6a27646b54b5f6d4e777d7fabd5d55.jpg)
text_image
Lock Settings-PIN Entry Please enter new PIN PIN * * * *- Enter the PIN number twice at first setting.
• Make a note of the PIN number in case you forget it.
■ To change the PIN number
- Select [Change PIN]

text_image
Lock Settings Change PIN Access Adjustment Lock On
2 Select [Adjustment Lock] and set to [On]

text_image
Lock Settings Change PIN On select access / store- Enter a new PIN number twice

Copy the settings to the other input [Copy Adjustment]
You can copy the selected [Professional1] or [Professional2] settings to that of the other input. The settings of [Contrast], [Brightness], [Colour], [Sharpness], [Tint] and [Advanced Settings] will be copied.
Select the destination to copy to
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Copy the settings to the other input [Copy Adjustment] - 1](/content/2026/05/796352/images/6b1d30fac3a44a3cdc7698efacabc64b2bc306f5027238c45420043f5684de31.jpg)
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Copy the settings to the other input [Copy Adjustment] - 2](/content/2026/05/796352/images/843464ab1f2b3abf507366b60e781b0bac1c3766d7ddbad8e9874d1f5cffeb2c.jpg)
select access / store
- You cannot copy to the locked mode.
USB HDD / SD Card Recording
You can record the digital TV programmes to the connected USB HDD or inserted SD Card and enjoy playing back in various ways.
- Analogue TV programme cannot be recorded to the USB HDD / SD Card.
- The data broadcasting (MHEG, etc.), radio broadcasting and the periods without any signal will not be recorded.
- Not all the programmes can be recorded depending on the broadcaster and service provider.
- You cannot copy the recorded contents.
- For more information of the USB HDD and the SD Card (p. 116)
Caution
- All data in the USB HDD / SD Card will be erased in the following cases :
- When formatting the USB HDD / SD Card with this TV ➤ "Setting for USB HDD / SD Card" (p. 75)
- When formatting the USB HDD / SD Card to use on PC
- When the TV is repaired due to a malfunction, you may have to format the USB HDD / SD Card again with this TV to use it. (All data will be erased when formatting.)
- In order to use the USB HDD with your PC after recording with this TV, format it again on your PC. (Special operations or tools may be necessary to format on your PC. For details, refer to the manual of the USB HDD.)
- You may use the SD Card with other equipment after recording with this TV. However, you have to format again with this TV for recording after using with the equipment.
- The data recorded to the USB HDD / SD Card with this TV can only be played back on this TV. You cannot play back its contents with another TV (including the TV of the same model number) or any equipment.
- Do not turn the TV off, disconnect the USB HDD or remove the SD Card during operation (formatting, recording, etc.). It may cause malfunction of the device or damage the recorded data.
Preparation for USB HDD / SD Card
USB HDD
Connect the USB HDD to the USB 3 port.
- Be sure to connect the USB HDD to the socket outlet.
• To remove the USB HDD safely from the TV (p. 21, 76)
socket outlet

flowchart
graph LR
A["Power Source"] --> B["USB HDD"]
B --> C["USB cable"]
C --> D["USB 3 (HDD)"]
D --> E["Monitor"]
SD Card
- SD Card with a capacity of over 512 MB is available for recording with this TV.
To record for a long time, a high capacity SD Card is necessary.
For more information→“Devices for recording or playing back” (p. 116) - To confirm the approximate recording time»“Recording time for the USB HDD / SD Card Recording” (p. 116)
- Ensure the write-protection switch (on the left side of the SD Card) is unlocked. Otherwise, the recording and playback are not available.

text_image
① Gently insert the SD Card label surface facing front. ② Push until a click is heard CutoutSetting for USB HDD / SD Card
Format and setup the USB HDD / SD Card with this TV in order to use it for recording.
- Before the settings, connect the USB HDD / SD Card (p. 74) and be sure to turn on the USB HDD.
• Prepare a new SD Card. Otherwise, you need to format the SD Card with this TV. (When formatting the SD Card, all data in it will be erased.)
• Prepare the USB HDD / SD Card for the exclusive use of recording with this TV.

text_image
MENU i EXIT OK BACK/ RETURNTo return to TV EXIT
1 Display the menu
MENU
2 Select [Setup]
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [Setup] - 1](/content/2026/05/796352/images/8ee47aa724e0529f4f333c53bd1030d09cd94089e1071f2b628aa35998df0b04.jpg)
text_image
VIERA Main Menu Picture Sound Timer Setup![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [Setup] - 2](/content/2026/05/796352/images/78814e68a6854d63dc42e49f0850cf58f3841ae2defe5d39b5031dc2edb9b70d.jpg)
3 Select [Recording Setup]
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [Recording Setup] - 1](/content/2026/05/796352/images/e428f1fb016e61b83f2a61e0b8790455ae8ad8bbd1ad923fcd624614774dd7c1.jpg)
text_image
Recording Setup![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [Recording Setup] - 2](/content/2026/05/796352/images/0f805b96a9d4b0cacb0c2568cdefd397f86d83e3336103840575e1172f9d9440.jpg)
4 Select [USB HDD Setup] or [SD Card Formatting] and set
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [USB HDD Setup] or [SD Card Formatting] and set - 1](/content/2026/05/796352/images/fb8b64a955f795bddfbd1dbd6b55ace4aa30bec59c2b98ca0f2adff2eb359629.jpg)
text_image
Recording Setup USB HDD Setup Access One Touch Recording 180 minutes Rewind LIVE TV Off Default REC Mode DR Access SD Card Information![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [USB HDD Setup] or [SD Card Formatting] and set - 2](/content/2026/05/796352/images/4168dfc4381bc78ad112ec86a24d7c40a84c02f1a7215780426a71467fbf338f.jpg)
• To check the information of the inserted SD Card → [SD Card Information]
Setup the USB HDD [USB HDD Setup]
All the USB devices recognised as a mass storage device will be listed.
- You can only choose one USB HDD for recording at a time.
- You cannot change the settings for the USB HDD while recording is in progress.
- Please note that USB HDD will be formatted and all data in it will be erased when you format it.
1 Select the USB HDD for recording and start setup

text_image
USB HDD Setup Product Name USB Drive A USB Flash Disk
- Some USB HDD may not be displayed.
• For the information of the highlighted device

2 Caution and confirmation of using USB HDD
Select [Yes] to proceed
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [Yes] to proceed - 1](/content/2026/05/796352/images/05778d1cef248a0e50d2f1b26631b1cf9f7479c5103471fe37865928b3a1d593.jpg)
text_image
USB HDD Formatting The data recorded to the USB HDD with this TV can only be played back on this TV. You cannot playback it with other TV (including the TV of the same model number) or any PCs. If your TV is repaired due to a malfunction, the USB HDD may not be available with your repaired TV. Continue? Yes No![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [Yes] to proceed - 2](/content/2026/05/796352/images/6c1f6db27af79d3d8d60dceb3b4cf313e13b9924e72f983147529c5b92840c8e.jpg)
text_image
USB HDD Formatting To use this device for recording, it must be formatted first. Continue? Yes No![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [Yes] to proceed - 3](/content/2026/05/796352/images/4b3b7a0316d4eb503647c030f91aad228b3e710bad6d22e5951e10e4b84ff6b2.jpg)
text_image
USB HDD Formatting This device will be formatted and all contents deleted. Are you sure? Yes No![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [Yes] to proceed - 4](/content/2026/05/796352/images/d947343d6302e22c839be344516c66f2e3970b79698fdf793a3ecb20d1c0de43.jpg)
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [Yes] to proceed - 5](/content/2026/05/796352/images/eb140c21e57143e875d6a0074733b5d407f3c2f1ac18b44ab794dbf39cc5f2b7.jpg)
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [Yes] to proceed - 6](/content/2026/05/796352/images/7ea382630f631e25e587e68e47bcb914dde6c6e3984b56bea31c3a09bda390de.jpg)
3 Confirmation of USB HDD name

text_image
USB HDD Formatting Name : USB Drive A Edit name? Yes No
The name for the USB HDD is created automatically. If you want to edit the name, select [Yes]. Set characters Store

text_image
USB HDD Name USB HDD 1| A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R T U V F X Y Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9:I: . a b c d g h -j ;k ;k ;n O P;q R s\t uVERY (Y=-)^

- You can set characters by using numeric buttons.
4 Confirmation to enable USB HDD for recording
If the formatted USB HDD for recording already exists, this confirmation screen will be displayed to switch to enable this USB HDD for recording.

text_image
USB HDD Formatting Do you want to enable this device now for recording? When disconnecting any USB device, always use the "Safely Remove USB" function in the USB HDD Device Setup menu to avoid any corruption of recorded content. Yes

text_image
USB HDD Setup Product Name USB Drive A USB HDD 1 USB Flash DiskMode
- : The USB HDD is available for recording / playing back. Only one USB HDD on the list can be available for recording. - : The USB HDD is available for playing back.
USB HDD name is displayed
- To format

(red)
(green)
• To edit USB HDD name

• To change the mode

• To remove the USB HDD safely from the TV

ellow)
• To set "Safely remove USB" in other conditions→ (p. 21)
SD Card Formatting
Formats the inserted SD Card for recording with this TV.
- Please note that all data in the SD Card will be erased after formatting.
1 Confirmation of formatting SD Card

text_image
SD Card Formatting Format SD card. Are you sure? Yes
2 Caution of using SD Card

text_image
SD Card Formatting Your SD card must be formatted before TV recordings can be made. All data stored on the SD card will be deleted during formatting. Continue? Yes

SD formatting will start
• If the formatting has failed,
- Ensure the SD Card is inserted correctly (p. 74)
- Ensure the write-protection switch is unlocked.
- Check your SD Card is suitable for recording. (p. 116)
Recording the TV programme to USB HDD / SD Card
You can record the current programme immediately by using [One Touch Recording].
You can also record the current programme constantly for the selected period by using [Rewind LIVE TV] so that you can go back or pause the current programme.
• [Rewind LIVE TV] is available only with USB HDD.
- Ensure the connection and setup are completed before start recording (p. 74 - 76)
- Do not turn the TV off, disconnect the USB HDD or remove the SD Card during recording.
- If the remaining capacity of the USB HDD / SD Card is run out, the recording cannot be done.

text_image
MENU GUIDE EXIT OK DVD/VCR TV 11/1- [0]To return to TV EXIT
1 Display the menu
MENU
-
2 Select [Setup]
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [Setup] - 1](/content/2026/05/796352/images/44edf20989c509f8ebff8834d41b488f684ed9a10885f41f1deb568df7bea144.jpg)
text_image
VISTA Main Menu Picture Sound Timer Setup![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [Setup] - 2](/content/2026/05/796352/images/b3a9a336cf1691bd8e38986b672e89400b1f04c61dc57f7ef4987d891efef492.jpg)
3 Select [Recording Setup]
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [Recording Setup] - 1](/content/2026/05/796352/images/8661f57b6192a7d23cf055e98d4109d227d8ed3b7c36abe7a73ed65454b33e48.jpg)
text_image
Recording Setup![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [Recording Setup] - 2](/content/2026/05/796352/images/16f8fc45e111440684112ad91ba89c88645d9887a274795d04205bf245e229ca.jpg)
4. Select [One Touch Recording] or [Rewind LIVE TV]
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [One Touch Recording] or [Rewind LIVE TV] - 1](/content/2026/05/796352/images/d33eb7e789dc6f101d33a20a7841ba5f57b2b0c29cd7d0a36d71a49f2f5d2fb2.jpg)
text_image
Recording Setup One Touch Recording 180 minutes Rewind LIVE TV Off Default REC Mode![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [One Touch Recording] or [Rewind LIVE TV] - 2](/content/2026/05/796352/images/2636ef017ff36ebe5ec7d8304ee960da40296fc9e3fefb4401b53bbcbba26dc5.jpg)
Default REC Mode
You can select default recording mode for [One Touch Recording].
“Recording time for the USB HDD / SD Card Recording” (p. 116)
[DR] : Direct recording (normal mode)
[LT1] : Long time recording
[LT2] : Extra long time recording
One touch direct TV recording - What you see is What you record [One Touch Recording]
Recording the current programme in the USB HDD or the SD Card immediately.
Select the maximum recording time [30] / [60] / [90] / [120] / [180] (minutes)
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - One touch direct TV recording - What you see is What you record [One Touch Recording] - 1](/content/2026/05/796352/images/7afbd1d959e6d6de13c1aa2365d72928626953f30899f082f2d4fac2520cd605.jpg)
text_image
Recording Setup USB HDD Setup One Touch Recording 180 minutes Rewind LIVE TV Off Default REC Mode DR SD Card Formatting SD Card Information![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - One touch direct TV recording - What you see is What you record [One Touch Recording] - 2](/content/2026/05/796352/images/217f12e7558c177d8255e1aed74fd1f2cee10ca11734773f38e7780d2fcb90f3.jpg)
select
access / store
LED will turn to orange (flash) while One Touch Recording is in progress.
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - One touch direct TV recording - What you see is What you record [One Touch Recording] - 3](/content/2026/05/796352/images/ba3d13bb39ad28077d44623f571092bbd2afb590c25c362868d87bf8bc4bf3ad.jpg)
text_image
LED■ To start One Touch Recording
Set the position to "TV"



- No other channel can be selected while the recording is in progress.
■ When both USB HDD and SD Card are available
Select the recording device

text_image
Please select recording device OK EXIT Select RETURN SD Card USB HDD1
■ To stop recording on the way






■ To play back or delete the recorded contents → “Recorded TV mode” (p. 87)
- Even if One Touch Recording is in progress, you can play back all the contents. (Depending on the USB HDD / SD Card, it may not be available or the recording may not work properly while playback.)
Record constantly [Rewind LIVE TV]
(USB HDD only)
Recording the currently viewed channel constantly.
Select [Auto] to start Rewind LIVE TV
| Recording Setup | |
| USB HDD Setup | |
| One Touch Recording | 180 minutes |
| Rewind LIVE TV | Auto |
| Default REC Mode | DR |
| SD Card Formatting | |
| SD Card Information | |
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [Auto] to start Rewind LIVE TV - 1](/content/2026/05/796352/images/39e9ccd0455e4ed7a7b6934d000f435a23b69dc89ca93168e67894b4ab0abcbb.jpg)
select
access / store
- When you select [Auto], the recording will start automatically.
- If the other recording is in progress, TV signal condition is bad or when any images are not displayed, this recording will not start.
■ To operate the Rewind LIVE TV
Set the position to "TV"

• To pause

• To search backward (up to 90 minutes)

(Press and hold)
• After pausing or searching backward, the following buttons are available to operate.

search backward playback / pause search forward
stop (stops the current operation and goes back to live TV)
search backward / forward

pause / playback

playback stop


stops the current operation and goes back to live TV
■ To stop the Rewind LIVE TV

text_image
Recording Setup USB HDD Setup One Touch Recording Rewind LIVE TV Default REC Mode SD Card Formatting SD Card Information Off Auto
select [Off]
- If you stop the Rewind LIVE TV, the recorded content for the Rewind LIVE TV will be deleted.
- Rewind LIVE TV will be stopped and the recorded content deleted automatically in the following conditions: (Even if Rewind LIVE TV stops for the following conditions, as long as the setting is [Auto], the new recording will start automatically in a condition that makes the recording available.)
- selected other channels
- selected locked channel
- selected invalid channel
- no TV signal
- when the other recording starts
- when the TV is turned off or standby
Using Media Player
Media Player allows you to enjoy photo, video or music recorded on an SD Card and a USB Flash Memory, and contents recorded with this TV on the exclusive recording devices (USB HDD / SD Card). VIERA IMAGE VIEWER is the function of the easy viewing for photos or videos recorded on an SD Card on the TV screen by simply inserting into the SD Card slot.
Photo mode: Still pictures recorded by digital cameras will be displayed.
Video mode : (For SD Card or USB Flash Memory) Moving pictures recorded by digital video cameras will be played back.
Recorded TV mode : (For exclusive USB HDD / SD Card) TV programmes recorded in the USB HDD / SD Card with this TV will be played back.
Music mode: Digital music data will be played back.
- During the operation, audio signal is output from AV1, AUDIO OUT, DIGITAL AUDIO OUT and HDMI2 (ARC function) terminals. But no video signals are output. AV1 can output audio signal if [AV1 out] is set to [Monitor] in the Setup Menu (p. 45). To use HDMI2 with ARC function, connect an amplifier that has ARC function (p. 103) and set to use theatre speakers (p. 109).
- [Date] shows the date on which the recording was made by the recording equipment. The file without record of the date is shown “**/**/****”.
• The picture may not appear correctly on this TV depending on the recording equipment used. - Display may take some time when there are many files and folders.
- Partly degraded files might be displayed at a reduced resolution.
• Picture setting may not work depending on the conditions. - The folder and file names may be different depending on the digital camera or digital video camera used.
To insert or remove the SD Card / USB Flash Memory
• For the USB HDD Connection →(p. 74)
USB Flash Memory

natural_image
Diagram of a printer with a base and paper feeding into a slot (no text or symbols)- Insert or remove straightly and completely.
- Before removing the USB Flash Memory, ensure to perform "Safely remove USB" (p. 21).
- Connect to the USB 1, 2 or 3 port.

SD Card
To insert the SD Card To remove the SD Card
① Gently insert the SD Card label surface facing front.
② Push until a-click is heard

text_image
Diagram showing a device with a play button and a cutout labeled 'Cutoff'Push the centre of the card

- For the information of the devices "Devices for recording or playing back" (p. 116)
• For the supported file format
→ "Supported file format in Media Player and media servers" (p. 114, 115)
Starting Media Player

text_image
INPUT AV EXIT OK BACK/ RETURN DVD/VCR TV 11/17 [0]To return to TV
EXIT

To return to the previous screen
BACK/RETURN

1 Insert the SD Card or USB Flash Memory to the TV → (p. 79)
- To play back contents in the USB HDD, check the connection and settings are completed. (p. 74 - 76)
2 Start Media Player
Media Player
Signal output from all AV terminals will be disabled during Media Player view. Press OK to proceed.
Press EXIT to return to TV viewing.

• Also possible by pressing following buttons.
AV → "Watching External Inputs" (p. 31)
3 Select the device you want to access to

text_image
Media Player Drive Select EXIT Select RETURN Access SD Card USB HDD/USB Flash...
① select
②access
- If two or more devices are not connected, this step will be skipped.
Selected device name
4 Select the content

text_image
Media Player Contents Select EXIT Select RETURN Access Photo Video Music... Recorded TV SD Card
① select
②access
[Photo]→ "Photo mode" (see below)
[Video]→“Video mode”(p. 85)
[Music]→“Music mode” (p. 89)
[Recorded TV]
→ "Recorded TV mode" (p. 87)
- You can also access each mode directly by using VIERA TOOLS.
→ "How to Use VIERA TOOLS" (p. 40)
• [Recorded TV] is available for contents recorded with this TV on the USB HDD / SD Card.
- Select the appropriate device and content for playing back each file.
- You can use the following buttons during playback.
Set the position to "TV"







Photo mode
Photo mode will read all ".jpg" extension files in the SD Card or USB Flash Memory.
The thumbnail of all the photos in the SD Card or USB Flash Memory will be displayed.
Example : Thumbnail - [All photos]

text_image
i EXIT OK OPTION BACK/ RETURNTo return to TV
EXIT

To return to the previous screen
BACK/
RETURN


text_image
Media Player Photo All photos View EXIT Info SD Card Select RETURN Option Menu Slideshow View Select Drive Select Contents Select• To change the back ground music
"Photo Settings" (p. 83, 84)
• To display the information of the highlighted photo


File number / Total file number
: Error display Selected device name
• To change the size of photos on a thumbnail screen
OPTION



① select [Change Size]
②change
■ To sort by folder, recorded date or recorded month
1 Display the view selection
(green)
2 Select the sort type
| Folder view |
| Sort by Date |
| Sort by Month |

①select
②access
[Folder view] :
Displays the thumbnail grouped by folder
- The files which are not into a folder will be collected to the folder named "/".
[Sort by Date] :
Displays the thumbnail grouped by the same date
• The group of the photos without recorded date is shown as [Unknown].
[Sort by Month] :
Displays the thumbnail grouped by the same month
• The group of the photos without recorded date is shown as [Unknown].
3 Select one of the sorted groups to display the thumbnail of the selected group

text_image
Media Player Photo Sort by Date 20/02/2010 5/10/2010 01/11/2010 05/11/2010 10/11/2010 22/11/2010 23/11/2010 29/11/2010 01/12/2010 05/12/2010 2012/2010 22/12/2010 Access EXIT Info SD Card Select RETURN Option Menu Slideshow View Select Drive Select Contents Select
② thumbnail of the selected group
• To return to the thumbnail of all photos
(green)


① select [All photos] ② access
• To display the information of the highlighted group

Group number / Total group number Folder name, date or month 1/12 Folder name 23/10/2010 Number of files 3
[Single view] - Photos are displayed one at a time.
Select the file from the thumbnail of photos to be viewed

select
②access
Example :

text_image
Single view Single view EXIT Select RETURN Stop RotateOperation guide
• To display / hide the operation guide

• To return to thumbnail
BACK/ RETURN

• To operate Single view

To the previous photo
Slideshow
To the next photo
Stop
(return to thumbnail)
• To rotate 90°
(blue)
[Slideshow] - Slideshow will complete when all photos have been viewed within the present thumbnail.
1 Select the file from the thumbnail of photos for the first view
2 Start Slideshow

(red)



select
• To display / hide the operation guide

• To pause (return to Single view)

• To return to thumbnail
(blue)
Multi Shot 3D
This TV can create the 3D photo using a pair of photos in the SD Card and save it into the same SD Card.
- This TV can also create the 3D photo from photos in the USB Flash Memory, but cannot save it.
• This function is available with photos recorded by digital cameras. - Depending on the photos you select, the created 3D photo may not be suitable or the 3D photo creation may not be possible. It is recommended to take a photo (for L) and then move your camera to the right about 5cm and take another photo (for R).
• To view the created 3D photo with 3D effect, you need the 3D Eyewear
→ "Standard accessories" (p. 6)
1 Display the option menu in the thumbnail view

2 Select [Multi Shot 3D]
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [Multi Shot 3D] - 1](/content/2026/05/796352/images/a57768b4c3008bf51bb0f0452d508c7ee88b96e63cb86129cb72c55642400145.jpg)
text_image
Option Menu Slideshow Settings Multi Shot 3D Change Size![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [Multi Shot 3D] - 2](/content/2026/05/796352/images/70e37ef47ae3ff38a30862b7dd9dfe6462533029cae6d238232037d9e8f15d0e.jpg)
3 Select two photos for L (left) and R (right)

text_image
Media Player Photo Multi Shot 3D All photos View EXIT Info SD Card Select RETURN Option Menu Select

- You can only select photos of the same recorded date and same pixels.
- You may not be able to view the created 3D photo properly if you select the photos for L and R oppositely.
4 Create the 3D photo

- If your selected photos are not suitable for the 3D photo, the error message will be displayed and will return to the photo selection screen (step 3).
• To save the 3D photo in the SD Card


text_image
The 3D image will be saved onto your media. Continue? Yes No
① select [Yes]
②save
After finishing saving the photo, the photo selection screen will be displayed (step 3). Select photos again to create another 3D photo or exit from [Multi Shot 3D] mode.
■ To enjoy the saved 3D photos
You can enjoy viewing the saved 3D photos.
Example : Thumbnail

text_image
Media Player Photo All photos Access EXIT Info SD Card Select RETURN Option Menu Sideshow View Select Drive Select Contents Select- Single view→ (p. 81)
• Slideshow→ (p. 81)
Saved 3D photo
Photo Settings
Setup the settings for Photo mode.
1 Display the option menu
OPTION

2 Select [Slideshow Settings]
Option Menu
Slideshow Settings
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [Slideshow Settings] - 1](/content/2026/05/796352/images/66c6b87c5db6533643b8094423fe4da06ce959e81cc7d3282463e7cb70850fc4.jpg)
access
3 Select the items and set
Slideshow Settings
| Frame | |
| Colour Effect | Off |
| Transition Effect | Fade |
| Aspect | Original |
| Burst Playback | Off |
| Interval | 5 seconds |
| Repeat | On |
| Back Ground Music | |

select
access / store
Note
• Picture quality may become lower depending on the slideshow settings.
• Picture setting may not work depending on the slideshow settings.
| Menu | Item Adjustments / Configurations (alternatives) | |
| Slideshow Settings | Frame | Selects the frame type of the slideshow[Off] / [Multi] / [Collage] / [Drift (+ calendar)] / [Drift] / [Gallery (+ calendar)] / [Gallery] / [Cinema][Multi] : 9 photos are displayed orderly at once.[Collage] : Each photo is displayed at a random position and random scale.[Drift (+ calendar)] / [Drift] : Photos are displayed like flow images.You can select to display the calendar or not. The month of calendar is turned by pressing left or right cursor button.[Gallery (+ calendar)] / [Gallery] :The various sizes of photos in the frame are displayed.You can select to display the calendar or not. The month of calendar is turned by pressing left or right cursor button.[Cinema] : Photos are displayed like old films (sepia tone) |
| Colour Effect | Selects the colour effect of photos on Single view and Slideshow[Off] / [Sepia] / [Gray scale]This function is not available when [Frame] is set to [Drift], [Gallery] or [Cinema]. | |
| Transition Effect | Selects the transition effect for switching the photo during the slideshow[Off] / [Fade] / [Slide] / [Dissolve] / [Motion] / [Random][Fade] : The next photo fades in gradually.[Slide] : The next photo slides and appears from the left side.[Dissolve] : Each photo is dissolved when switching to the next photo.[Motion] : Each photo is displayed with an effect of enlarging, reducing, moving up or moving down.[Random] : Each transition is selected at random.This function is available when [Frame] is set to [Off]. | |
| Aspect | Selects whether enlarged or normal viewing on Single view and Slideshow [Original] / [Zoom]This function is not available when [Frame] is set to [Collage], [Drift], [Gallery] or [Cinema].This function is not available when [Transition Effect] is set to [Motion].Depending on the photo size, it may not be fully enlarged to fill the screen, e.g. portrait style picture. | |
| Burst Playback | Selects whether to display burst photos in a fast-paced slideshow mode [Off] / [On]This function is not available when [Frame] is set to [Drift], [Gallery] or [Cinema].This function is not available when [Transition Effect] is set to [Motion]. | |
| Interval | Selects slideshow interval [5] / [10] / [15] / [30] / [60] / [90] / [120] (seconds)This function is not available when [Frame] is set to [Drift], [Gallery] or [Cinema].This function is not available when [Transition Effect] is set to [Motion]. | |
| Repeat Slideshow repeat [Off] / [On] | ||
| Slideshow Settings | Back Ground Music | Selects the back ground music during Photo mode[Off] / [Type1] / [Type2] / [Type3] / [User] / [Auto][Type1], [Type2] and [Type3] are the fixed music each installed in this TV.[User]: Music data in the device registered by yourself will be played back.To register the music1. Select the music file 2. Select [File] or [Folder]Depending on the condition of the device, select folders until you reach the desired music file. |
| Register Slideshow BGM?FileFolder | ||
| 1select2set[File]: The selected music file will be registered as back ground music.[Folder]: All the music in the folder which contains the selected music file will be registered as back ground music. | ||
| If no music has been registered or the device which has the registered music is removed, no sound will be produced.[Auto]: Music data stored in the root folder of the current device will be played back randomly.If there is no available music data, no sound will be produced. | ||
Change the device
You can change to the other device directly in the same mode if two or more devices are connected.
1 While the thumbnail is displayed, display the device selection
(yellow)
2 Select the device you want to access to

text_image
Media Player Photo All photos Drive Select EXIT Select RETURN Access SD Card USB HDD1 USB Flash... d
Selected device name
Change the contents
You can switch to the other mode of Media Player from the thumbnail view.
- The mode can be switched in the current device.
1 While the thumbnail is displayed, display the contents selection
(blue)
2 Select the contents

text_image
Media Player Photo All photos Contents Select EXIT Select RETURN Photo Video Music Recorded TV Access SD Card
[Photo] "Photo mode" (p. 80)
[Video]→“Video mode” (p. 85)
[Music]→“Music mode” (p. 89)
[Recorded TV]
→ "Recorded TV mode" (p. 87)
Video and Recorded TV mode
• Supported file format →(p. 114)
Video mode
(For SD Card or USB Flash Memory)

text_image
MENU ASPECT EXIT OPTION BACK/ RETURN Panasonic TV■ To return to TV EXIT

■ To return to the previous screen
BACK/RETURN

Note
• The structure of titles and scenes may vary depending on the digital video camera used.
The thumbnail of video titles in the SD Card or USB Flash Memory will be displayed.
Example : Thumbnail - [Title view]

text_image
Media Player Video Title view Trip1 Nature3 Trip4 Trip5 Room Nature1 Nature3 Nature4 Nature5 Nature6 2010_4 2010_7Nature2 2010_9 Access EXIT Info SD Card Select RETURN Option Menu Play Drive Select Contents SelectSelected device name
: Error display
: The file does not support thumbnail view.
• To view the scenes of the title Select the title
Example : Thumbnail - [Scene view]

text_image
Media Player Video Title view > Trip1 Trip1 1 Trip1 2 Trip1 3 Trip1 4 Trip1 5 Trip1 6 Trip1 7 Trip1 8 Play EXIT Info SD Card Select RETURN Option Menu Play Drive Select Contents Select
The preview will start when the title is highlighted if it supports a preview.
- To turn off the preview → "Video Setup" (p. 86) - To display the information of the highlighted title

text_image
i Title Date & Time 19/02/2010 11:21 Number of scenes 8 Duration 00h15m39s ACHD 1/15 Trip1 File format Title number / Total title numberThe preview will start when the scene is highlighted if it supports a preview.
- To turn off the preview → "Video Setup" (p. 86) - To display the information of the highlighted scene

text_image
i Scene Date & Time 19/02/2010 11:21 Duration 00h04m12s 1/8 Trip1_1 File format Scene number / Total scene number■ Playback from Title view
Playback of the selected title will start.
• To repeat playback→“Video Setup” (p. 86)
1 Select the title 2 Start playback

select

■ Playback from the selected scene in the title (SD-Video or AVCHD)
Playback will start from the selected scene to the end of the title.
• To repeat playback → "Video Setup" (p. 86)
1 Select the title

2 Select the scene

3 Start playback

■ How to operate in the playback
Example : Playback

text_image
SD 19/02/2010 11:21 08:16:39 00:02:05 EXIT RETURNOperation guide Information banner
• To change aspect
• To the previous title / scene


• To display / hide the operation guide and information banner

• To operate the playback

flowchart
graph TD
A["OK"] --> B["Rewind"]
A --> C["II/▶ Pause / Playback"]
A --> D["Fast forward"]
A --> E["Stop"]
• To the next title / scene

• To return to thumbnail

■ To change the device “Change the device” (p. 84)
■ To change the content in the current device → “Change the contents” (p. 84)
■ Video Setup
Setup the settings for Video mode.
1 Display the option menu in the thumbnail view

2 Select [Video Setup] 3 Select the items and set
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [Video Setup] 3 Select the items and set - 1](/content/2026/05/796352/images/c5bbecc5eb58008eab125950efd47b1d731b2d85fe34d4e09922acbf3908fe43.jpg)
| Video Setup Menu | |
| Video Preview | |
| Repeat | Off |
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [Video Setup] 3 Select the items and set - 2](/content/2026/05/796352/images/00a4d5e9e8c79da334f5a192e0cf23fc5ec63fe2739ffdbc6d92f3993935da89.jpg)
access
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [Video Setup] 3 Select the items and set - 3](/content/2026/05/796352/images/9cca7e6655059ee23f7ba4b85a5c82b66f958664c95d2f6777fea33329e94aad.jpg)
select
access / store
| Menu | Item Adjustments / Configurations (alternatives) | |
| Video Setup | Video Preview | Sets to start the preview of the title or scene in the thumbnail view [Off] / [On]• Image may not be displayed for an instant in the thumbnail view. Set the preview [Off] to resolve this. |
| Repeat | Playback repeat within the title or selected file (depending on the content) [Off] / [On] | |
■ Confirm or change the current status
You can confirm or change the current status of the content.
- Menu items and selectable options vary depending on the content.
1 Display the option menu during playback

2 Select [Video Setup] 3 Select the items and set
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [Video Setup] 3 Select the items and set - 1](/content/2026/05/796352/images/a1186b0ca7f3195baf447f93921946706201dc7f23b4dfd919ab142c3e68f666.jpg)
| Video Setup Menu | |
| Multi Audio | |
| Aspect Change | Aspect1 |
| Repeat | Off |
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [Video Setup] 3 Select the items and set - 2](/content/2026/05/796352/images/ff281917ed1ad23e0acae8e4c48fa9fd6569e3c323068736fbbe184b3ecc6349.jpg)
access
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [Video Setup] 3 Select the items and set - 3](/content/2026/05/796352/images/f6afc0b0be483aee98b775c56336be0ea66dd983d3c0850f36a3d9850cf93496.jpg)
select
access / store
| Menu | Item Adjustments / Configurations (alternatives) | |
| Video Setup | Multi Audio | Allows you to select between selectable sound tracks (if available)It may take several seconds to change the sound. |
| Aspect Change | [Aspect1] : Displays the content enlarged without distortion[Aspect2] : Displays the content full-screen[Original] : Displays the content original sizeYou can also change the aspect using the ASPECT button.Aspect change may not work depending on the content. | |
(For exclusive USB HDD / SD Card)
Contents list of the selected device will be displayed.
- For the SD Card, ensure the write-protection switch (on the left side of the SD Card) is unlocked to play back.
Example : Contents list

text_image
Media Player Recorded TV Remaining Capacity 500GB (50%) All Not Viewed Channel FileDate BBC 1 Thu 28/10 Das Erste 1 12:00 1 00:00 ITV Mon 10/1 News 3 13:30 BBC 2 Sat 15/1 Cinema 1 13:50 Play Select EXIT RETURN Option Menu Info Chapter List Select USB HDD 1 DeleteRemaining capacity of the selected device (This value may not be accurate depending on the condition.)
- You can also access the contents list directly by using VIERA TOOLS.
→ "How to Use VIERA TOOLS" (p. 40)
• To display the information of the highlighted content


text_image
- Channel DVB, BBC 1 - Title Das Erste - Date & Time Thu 28/10/2010 12:00 - Duration 00:20[All]: All the recorded contents are listed.
[Not Viewed] (USB HDD only) : Contents not played back are listed.
G: Appears when the recorded content has the guidance information (parental rating, etc.) or the channel of the content is restricted by Child Lock.
This content requires entering PIN number to play back.
(USB HDD only)
P :Content not played back (Once you play back the content, this icon will disappear.)
:Protected content cannot be deleted.
● :Content under recording (You can play back this content even if under recording.)
:Two or more contents are grouped.
■ Playback the content from the list
1 Select the content 2 Start playback


- If you stopped the last playback on the way, the confirmation screen asking whether you wish to start from the last stopped part or beginning will be displayed. Select your desired option. (USB HDD only)
- If the content has multiple programmes with the different parental ratings, the highest restriction is valid for the content. Once you unlock the restriction, all the programmes in the content can be played back.
■ To edit recording content (USB HDD only)
1 Select and tick the 2 Display the option content to edit menu


3 Select the item and edit

text_image
Option Menu Create Group Release Group Exclude from Group Change Protect Status ① select OK ② edit[Create Group] :
Two or more contents can be grouped. Select and tick all the desired contents, and then select [Create Group].
[Release Group] :
Select the created group you want to release, and then select [Release Group]. (To release several groups at once, tick all the desired groups.)
[Exclude from Group] :
Select the group and press the OK button to display the grouped contents. To exclude only the specific content from the group, select it and then select [Exclude from Group]. (To exclude several contents at once, tick all the desired contents.)
[Change Protect Status] :
Select the content you want to protect to delete, and then select [Change Protect Status]. Perform the same way to cancel the protection. (To change the status of several contents at once, tick all the desired contents.)
■ Delete the selected content
1 Select the content

select
2 Delete the content

3 Confirm

text_image
Delete Are you sure you want to delete ? Yes No
• To select two or more contents

■ How to operate in the playback
Example : Playback

text_image
Das ErsteUSB 00:19:39 00:02:05 Manual skip RETURN Operation guide Information banner• To display / hide the operation guide and information banner

• To return to list

• To operate the playback

flowchart
graph TD
A["OK"] --> B["R"]
A --> C["[Man"]]
A --> D["Pre"]
A --> E["Pre"]
A --> F["II/▶"]
A --> G["▶"]
A --> H["■"]
[lewind [nual skip] less to skip forward less and hold to ski Pause / Playback Fast forward Stop
- To repeat between the starting point "A" and finishing point "B"
Set "A" and "B" in order

- The points will be reset by pressing this button again or other operations.
• To change aspect

• To the previous / next chapter

• A recorded content is automatically divided into chapters (about five minutes for each).
• To display the subtitle (if available)

• To confirm or change the current status (if available)
→ "Display the selectable settings for the current status" (p. 21)
■ Chapter List (USB HDD only)
You can start playback from the chapter list you select.
- The chapter list is not displayed while the selected content is being recorded.
To play back from the chapter list



natural_image
Black-and-white photo of a hand holding tulips, no visible text or symbols in the main image area
① select ② playback
Note
- Depending on the recorded programmes, some playback operations may not work properly.
■ Change the device
You can change to the other device directly in the same mode if two or more devices are connected.
1 Display the option menu
OPTION

2 Select [Drive Select]
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [Drive Select] - 1](/content/2026/05/796352/images/738a0dc1b2373e308ef412a2fb1f10893fed8c413a9547cfd22b870c57c7d0b7.jpg)
text_image
Option Menu Create Group Release Group Drive Select Contents Select Change Protect Status3 Select the device you want to access to

text_image
Drive Select EXIT Select RETURN Access SD Card USB HDD1 USB Flash... USB HDD1
①select
②access
If you select the device to play back photos, videos or music, change to the appropriate content.
• To change the content
OPTION



① select [Contents Select]
②access

①select
②access
Audio output Settings
You can enjoy the multi-channel sound via an amplifier connected to DIGITAL AUDIO OUT or HDMI2 (ARC function) terminal.
• To confirm or change the current sound status→“Confirm or change the current status” (p. 86)
1 Display the menu
MENU

2 Select [Sound]

text_image
VIEWA Main Menu Picture Sound Timer Setup
①select
②access
3 Select [SPDIF Selection] and set

text_image
SPDIF Selection Auto Reset to Defaults Reset
select
access / store
| Menu | Item Adjustments / Configurations (alternatives) | |
| Sound | SPDIF Selection | SPDIF : A standard audio transfer file formatSelects the initial setting for digital audio output signal from DIGITAL AUDIO OUT and HDMI2 (ARC function) terminals [Auto] / [PCM][Auto] : Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby Digital and HE-AAC (48 kHz) multi-channel are output as Dolby Digital Bitstream.DTS is output as DTS.MPEG is output as PCM.[PCM] : Digital output signal is fixed to PCM. |
Music mode
• Supported file format →(p. 115)

text_image
EXIT OK OPTION BACK/ RETURNTo return to TV
EXIT

To return to the previous screen
BACK/RETURN

The thumbnail of music folders in the SD Card or USB Flash Memory will be displayed.
Example : Thumbnail - [Folder view]

text_image
Media Player Music Folder view My Music_1 My Music_2 My Music_3 Access EXIT Info SD Card Select RETURN Option Menu Play Folder Drive Select Contents Select Selected device name• To display the information of the highlighted folder

Folder number / Total folder number Folder name My Music_1 Number of files 1/3
■ Playback from Folder view
All the files in the selected folder will be played back.
1 Select the folder 2 Start playback

select

■ Playback from File view
Selected file will be played back.
1 Select the folder

2 Select the file
Example : Thumbnail - File view

text_image
Media Player Music Folder view > My Music_1 My Song_1 My Song_2 My Song_3 My Song_4 My Song_5 My Song_6 My Song_7 My Song_6 My Song_10 My Song_11 My Song_8 Play EXIT Info SD Card Select RETURN are Option Menu Play Folder Drive Select Contents Select3 Start playback


• To display the information of the highlighted file

text_image
1/11 Title My Song_1 Album My Music_1 Artist My Favourite Track No. 1 Duration 00h03m29s — File number / Total file number■ How to operate in the playback
Example : Playback

text_image
My Song_9 My Favourite My Music_1 00:02.43 / 00:05.44 EXIT RETURNOperation guide
• To display / hide the operation guide

• To operate the playback

flowchart
graph TD
A["OK"] --> B["Rewind"]
A --> C["II/▶ Pause / Playback"]
A --> D["Fast forward"]
A --> E["Stop"]
• To the previous track

• To the next track

• To return to thumbnail


■ To change the device → "Change the device" (p. 84)
■ To change the content in the current device → “Change the contents” (p. 84)
Music Setup
Setup the setting for Music mode (only available in the thumbnail view).
1 Display the option menu

2 Select [Music Setup]


3 Set


[Folder] : Playback repeat within the selected folder
[One] : Playback repeat of the selected one file
Using Network Services (DLNA / VIERA Connect / freesat)
DLNA®
This TV is a DLNA Certified™ product.
DLNA (Digital Living Network Alliance) is a standard that makes DLNA Certified digital electronics easier and more convenient to use on a home network. To learn more, visit www.dlna.org.
It allows you to share photos, videos and music stored in the DLNA Certified media server (for example, PC with windows 7 installed, DIGA Recorder etc.) connected to your home network, and enjoy the contents on the TV screen. It also allows you to control the TV with the DLNA certified equipment connected to your home network (DLNA Remote Control).
• For the supported file format →(p. 114, 115)
- AVCHD and DivX files are not supported by DLNA, but can be played by Media Player (p. 79).
■ Media server
Store photos, videos or music into the DLNA Certified media server, and then you can enjoy them on the TV.
To use a PC as a media server
Prepare the PC with Windows 7 or ensure the server software is installed on the PC.
"Windows 7" and "TwonkyMedia server 6 (installed on the PC with Windows 7, Windows Vista or Windows XP)" are the server software that has been tested for compatibility with this TV (current as of January, 2011). Any other server software have not been tested with this TV, therefore compatibility and performance cannot be assured.
- Windows 7
The setup for homegroup settings of Windows 7 is required. For details, refer to the help functions of Windows 7.
•TwonkyMedia server
"TwonkyMedia server" is the product of PacketVideo Corporation.
To obtain the Installation Guides for installing and setting "TwonkyMedia server", visit the website of TwonkyMedia.
Additional fees may be charged to obtain server software.
Note
- For more information about the server software, please consult each software company.
- When server software for the media server is installed on the PC, the data may be at risk of being accessed by other people. Please take care of the settings and connections under the network circumstances at the office, hotel or even at home when not using a router.
To use a DLNA compatible DIGA Recorder as a media server
By connecting a DLNA compatible DIGA Recorder to your home network, you can enjoy and control it as one of the media servers.
- Please refer to the manual of your DIGA Recorder to confirm whether the recorder is compatible with DLNA.
■ DLNA Remote Control
You can control the TV with the DLNA certified equipment.
• To use this function, set the [Network Link Settings]→(p. 93)
- "Windows 7" is the OS that has been tested for compatibility of this TV (current as of January, 2011).
For the operations, refer to the help functions of Windows 7.
Network connection "Example 1" or "Example 2" in "Network connections" (p. 92)
Network setup → (p. 93 - 97)
DLNA operations → (p. 98 - 101)
VIERA Connect
VIERA Connect is a gateway to the internet services unique to Panasonic and has expanded VIERA CAST features greatly.
VIERA Connect allows you to access some specific websites supported by Panasonic, and enjoy internet contents such as photos, videos, games, etc. from VIERA Connect home screen.
- This TV has no full browser function and all features of websites may not be available.
Network connection ➔ “Example 1” or “Example 3” in “Network connections” (p. 92)
Network setup → (p. 93 - 97)
VIERA Connect operations → (p. 18, 101)
freesat UK only
freesat may give you access to the interactive services and features through an internet connection.
- Please contact broadcasters for availability of services.
Network connections
To use only DLNA features, you can operate the features without broadband network environment. To use VIERA Connect features or freesat interactive services, you need a broadband network environment.
- If you do not have any broadband network services, please consult your retailer for assistance.
- Set up and connect any equipment required for the network environment. You cannot make settings for the equipment on this TV. Read the manual of the equipment.
- Required speed (effective): at least 1.5 Mbps for SD and 6 Mbps for HD picture quality, respectively. If the transfer speed is not enough, contents may not be played back properly.
Example 1
(For DLNA and VIERA Connect)

flowchart
graph TD
A["User"] --> B["Wireless connection"]
B --> C["Internet"]
D["Computer"] --> E["Wireless LAN Adaptor and Extension cable"]
E --> F[""Standard accessories" (p. 6)"]
E --> G["Connect to the USB 1 or 2 port."]
H["Wired connection"] --> I["LAN cable"]
J["Access point"] --> K["Modem"]
K --> L["Hub or Router"]
L --> M["Internet"]
N["DLNA Certified media server (for example, PC, DIGA Recorder, etc.)"] --> L
- Ensure to use a LAN straight cable for this connection.
- If your modem has no broadband router functions, use a broadband router.
- If your modem has broadband router functions but there are no vacant ports, use a hub.
- Ensure that the broadband routers and hubs are compatible with 10BASE-T / 100BASE-TX.
- If you use the equipment compatible only with 100BASE-TX, category 5 LAN cables are required.
Example 2
(For DLNA)
You can connect the TV and the equipment directly to use DLNA features.

flowchart
graph LR
A["Monitor"] --> B["Ethernet"]
B --> C["LAN cable"]
C --> D["DLNA Certified media server (for example, PC, DIGA Recorder, etc.)"]
- Ensure to use a LAN cross cable for this connection.
Example 3
(For VIERA Connect)
You can connect the TV and the telecommunication equipment directly to use VIERA Connect features.

flowchart
graph LR
A["Monitor"] --> B["Ethernet"]
B --> C["LAN cable"]
C --> D["Internet"]
Note
- Contact your Internet Service Provider (ISP) telecommunications company for further assistance regarding the network equipment.
- Confirm the terms and conditions of the contracts with your Internet Service Provider (ISP) or telecommunications company. Depending on the contracts, additional fees may be charged or multiple connections to the internet may be impossible.
Network Setup
- Ensure the connections are completed before starting Network Setup.
→ "Network connections" (p. 92)

text_image
1 Display the menu MENU 2 Select [Setup] VIERA Main Menu Picture Sound Timer Setup ① select ② access 3 Select [Network Setup] Network Setup ①select ②access To return to TVEXIT

Network Link settings
Settings which allow the TV to be controlled by the equipment connected to the network.
1 Select [Network Link Settings] 2 Select the items and set
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [Network Link Settings] 2 Select the items and set - 1](/content/2026/05/796352/images/7951fb3edd60f10a04ef491c216d148714db79708cc3794aa2a56d6a09ad1283.jpg)
text_image
Network Setup Connection Test Network Type Wired Access Point Settings IP/DNS Settings Network Link Settings Access Software Update MAC Address ab-cd-ef-gh-ij-kl![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [Network Link Settings] 2 Select the items and set - 2](/content/2026/05/796352/images/4e776192fe0725149477837d7e0a1094be59d7535958fd361ecc87450ea01959.jpg)
①select
②access
| Network Link Settings | |
| VIERA Name | VIERA |
| DLNA Remote Control | On |
| DLNA Remote Volume | On |
| Network Remote Control | On |
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [Network Link Settings] 2 Select the items and set - 3](/content/2026/05/796352/images/7a6bb9bc317b9654defdc2b9f188d70857b37b87a151808960668afc0e6a6aa8.jpg)
select
access / store
| Menu | Item Adjustments / Configurations (alternatives) | |
| Network Link Settings | VIERA Name | Sets your favourite name for this TVThis name will be used as the name of this TV on the screen of the other network equipment. |
| DLNA Remote Control | Enables to control the TV using Windows 7 via the network [Off] / [On] | |
| DLNA Remote Volume | Enables to control the volume of the TV using Windows 7 via the network [Off] / [On] | |
| Network Remote Control | Enables to control the TV from the network equipment (Smartphone, etc.) [Off] / [On]Depending on the area, this function may not be available. For details, consult your local Panasonic dealer.For more information of this function, visit the following website.http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/tv/ | |
Wired connection settings
This setting is for the network connection by using the LAN cable.
1 Select [Network Type] and set to [Wired]
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [Network Type] and set to [Wired] - 1](/content/2026/05/796352/images/71ab90262c1096253c33bb9930352b730e79c1036b36e06badc3ce2afe5d74da.jpg)
text_image
Network Setup Connection Test Network Type Wired Access Point Settings IP/DNS Settings Network Link Settings Software Update MAC Address ab-cd-ef-gh-ij-kl![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [Network Type] and set to [Wired] - 2](/content/2026/05/796352/images/af8277210e9afb111b4d98aff4c3e02c9a6646cbf4960623ea045711047026b0.jpg)
select
access / store
If you make the network connection like "Example 2" (p. 92), you do not have to set [Acquire DNS Address], [Proxy] and [Proxy Port].
2 Select [IP/DNS Settings] and set the items
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [IP/DNS Settings] and set the items - 1](/content/2026/05/796352/images/cfe5d6a191b43b952a191ff2187171d2bc4bdddbeb99fcb569ea37f3e1e79698.jpg)
text_image
Network Setup IP/DNS Settings![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [IP/DNS Settings] and set the items - 2](/content/2026/05/796352/images/80552d6c8dc7aa7db87fc853e55464d46ebcd261b5a4e725d28c44892bc4e189.jpg)
① select
②access
■ [Acquire IP Address] / [Acquire DNS Address]
Sets [IP Address], [Subnet Mask], [Gateway], [Primary DNS] and [Secondary DNS]. Select [Acquire IP Address] / [Acquire DNS Address] and set to [Auto] (recommended)
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - ■ [Acquire IP Address] / [Acquire DNS Address] - 1](/content/2026/05/796352/images/457453f945b87b9d8d1f45b4a39a92da6bfef4b32ce1df5d7aba59774ac99715.jpg)
text_image
IP/DNS Settings Acquire IP Address IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway Acquire DNS Address DNS Address Proxy Settings- The available settings are displayed automatically.
Manual settings
([IP Address], [Subnet Mask], [Gateway], [Primary DNS], [Secondary DNS])
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - ■ [Acquire IP Address] / [Acquire DNS Address] - 2](/content/2026/05/796352/images/99e639402cf3f36940173f3ca309aec865ef4cff9260a1ef0a7a393734148f51.jpg)
select
access / store
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - ■ [Acquire IP Address] / [Acquire DNS Address] - 3](/content/2026/05/796352/images/8bd076f0d22f43bd51316e594331256bf21053ef704ee00f88a35ca6d5848ad6.jpg)
3 Select [Proxy Settings] and set the items
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [Proxy Settings] and set the items - 1](/content/2026/05/796352/images/fb287ddabf485a7c82b8201c3d01446eab19cb0c0e962f06f881b862dfc18471.jpg)
text_image
IP/DNS Settings Acquire IP Address Auto IP Address . Subnet Mask . Gateway . Acquire DNS Address Auto DNS Address . Proxy Settings Access![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [Proxy Settings] and set the items - 2](/content/2026/05/796352/images/4f8780bb2f5ee113144e4cc67524f6b673e2f220cf8abaf931d2cb23c2ea17d4.jpg)
①select
②access
•After settings, return to [Network Setup] screen
BACK/RETURN
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [Proxy Settings] and set the items - 3](/content/2026/05/796352/images/a5fca355bbf270544684e446de86dd7bf46784a5352646e3dfcfaa85b8671837.jpg)
[Proxy]
Sets Proxy address.
- This is the address of the relay server that is connected to the target server instead of the browser and sends data to the browser. Setting is required if specified by the provider.
- Select [Proxy] 2. Enter the address 3. Store
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - [Proxy] - 1](/content/2026/05/796352/images/6231201c2ab0e7ca7de212e0b0570131d4e7b36dbac8eeeea9044f8660a0fd4e.jpg)
text_image
Proxy Settings Proxy Proxy Port 0![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - [Proxy] - 2](/content/2026/05/796352/images/0beb5cd91714527a44df4a8360fda8fc814126034248f2ef6f9852714d614795.jpg)
text_image
Proxy Host A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ! # a b c d e g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u y w x y z ( | + - * _BACK/
RETURN
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - [Proxy] - 3](/content/2026/05/796352/images/3aab764f2e8935d7799390cc34d52635bdb917c564ad529f184d782329ed7f03.jpg)
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - [Proxy] - 4](/content/2026/05/796352/images/004e64ff562d8c985e66f2925bc11cb23437900cf6895f57d92b238504d04082.jpg)
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - [Proxy] - 5](/content/2026/05/796352/images/477298b2ae4ebea4ab4d02b66859a4ab0a2e30cfa2ce3ea68162a47c9f3851c4.jpg)
• To use numeric buttons
“Characters table for numeric buttons” (p. 117)
■ [Proxy Port]
Sets Proxy port number.
- This number is also specified by the provider with the Proxy address.
1. Select [Proxy Port]
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [Proxy Port] - 1](/content/2026/05/796352/images/95c5ff48104126d9b7783428a2ae4e9273d39252df4f359877d6eabd8ea92a3f.jpg)
text_image
Proxy Settings Proxy Proxy Port 0![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [Proxy Port] - 2](/content/2026/05/796352/images/c66fb3062c9d73ecf83727e3fa2caec97f4965b51b14c848f63b2062acb9ddcb.jpg)
select
2. Move the cursor and enter the number

4 Select [Connection Test] and access to test
| Network Setup | |
| Connection Test | Access |
| Network Type | Wired |
| Access Point Settings | |
| IP/DNS Settings | |
| Network Link Settings | |
| Software Update | |
| MAC Address | ab-cd-ef-gh-ij-kl |
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [Connection Test] and access to test - 1](/content/2026/05/796352/images/fcc65b28307b7bf93c47985bb410a6a02e1b022a468b496bd1c809938a276e5b.jpg)
- Performs automatic testing of the network connection for the TV. (It takes a while to test.)
Connection Test
Check network cable connection.
Check acquired IP address.
Check for devices using same IP address.
Check gateway connection
Check server connection for VIERA Connect.
√ : succeeded
The test is successful and the TV is connected to the network.
: failed
Check the settings and connections, and then perform this function again.
Wireless connection settings
This setting is for the network connection by using the Wireless LAN Adaptor. (Wireless connection)
- Confirm the encryption key, settings and positions of your access point before starting setup. For details, read the manual of the access point.
1 Select [Network Type] and set to [Wireless]
| Network Setup | |
| Connection Test | |
| Network Type | Wireless |
| Access Point Settings | |
| IP/DNS Settings | |
| Network Link Settings | |
| Software Update | |
| MAC Address | ab-cd-ef-gh-ij-kl |
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [Network Type] and set to [Wireless] - 1](/content/2026/05/796352/images/de622a35a43a9ede5894349e130104ab0b8b633eab939aa15c98145ffaae9324.jpg)
select
access / store
2 Select [Access Point Settings]
| Network Setup | |
| Connection Test | |
| Network Type | Wireless |
| Access Point Settings | Access |
| IP/DNS Settings | |
| Network Link Settings | |
| Software Update | |
| MAC Address | ab-cd-ef-gh-ij-kl |
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [Access Point Settings] - 1](/content/2026/05/796352/images/0ebed774d8219609277967375e291f8474432a828f99ec4f78b5b4d81575fe04.jpg)
①select
②access
- When the access point is already set, [Current Settings] screen will be displayed. To change the settings, select [No] on this screen and go to the next step.
3 Select the connection type and set
| Connection Type |
| Please select network connection type. |
| WPS(Push button) |
| WPS(PIN) |
| Search for access point |
| Manual |

①select
②access
- For details of each connection type (p. 96, 97)
• After settings, return to [Network Setup] screen

4 Select [Connection Test] and access to test
Network Setup
Connection Test
Network Type
Access Point Settings
IP/DNS Settings
Network Link Settings
Software Update
MAC Address ab-cd-ef-gh-ij-kl
Connection Test
Check access point connection.
Check acquired IP address.
☑ Check for devices using same IP address.
Check gateway connection.
Check server connection for VIERA Connect.

① select
②access
Performs automatic testing of the network connection for the TV. (It takes a while to test.)

: succeeded
The test is successful and the TV is connected to the network.

: failed
Check the settings and connections, and then perform this function again. If you continue to have difficulty, please contact your internet service provider.
■ [WPS(Push button)]
WPS(Push button)
1) Please press the 'WPS' button on the access point until its light flashes.
2) When the light is flashing select 'Connect' on TV.
If you are unsure, please check the instruction manual of the access point.
Connect
① press the WPS button on the access point until the light flashes

② connect the Wireless LAN Adaptor and the access point
- Ensure that your access point supports WPS for this setup.
• WPS : Wi-Fi Protected Setup™
[WPS(PIN)]
1 Select your desired access point
Available Access Points
| No. | Access point type Encrypt Reception | |||
| 1 | Access Point A | 11n(2.4GHz) | B | viii |
| 2 | Access Point B | 11n(5GHz) | B | viii |
| 3 | Access Point C | 11n(5GHz) | viii | |

①select
②access
- Ensure that your access point supports WPS for this setup.
• To search access points again

- For the information of the highlighted access point

- To set manually

2 Enter the PIN code to the access point, and then select [Connect]
WPS(PIN)
Please register the following PIN codes on the access point.
PIN code : 12345678
Select 'Connect' after entering and saving the settings on the access point.
Connect

■ [Search for access point]
Access points found automatically are listed.
1 Select your desired access point
| Available Access Points | ||||
| No. | MS@Pass type Encrypt Reception | |||
| 1 | Access Point A | 11n(2.4GHz) | ||
| 2 | Access Point B | 11n(5GHz) | ||
| 3 | Access Point C | 11n(5GHz) | ||

①select
②access
- : Encrypted access point
• To search access points again

• For the information of the highlighted access point

- To set manually

2 Access the encryption key input mode

text_image
Encryption Key Setting Connection will be made with the following settings:- SSID : Access Point A Authentication type : WPA-PSK Encryption type : TKIP Please input the encryption key. Encryption key
- If the selected access point is not encrypted, the confirmation screen will be displayed. It is recommended to select the encrypted access point.
3 Enter the encryption key of the access point (Set characters one by one)

text_image
Access Point Settings Encryption key A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U Y W X Y Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ! : # a b c d e f g h i j x l m n o p q r s t u y w x y z ( ) + - ' ,

- To use numeric buttons "Characters table for numeric buttons" (p. 117)
4 Select [Yes]
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [Yes] - 1](/content/2026/05/796352/images/455fe7b3a607cb5dec3868e2fe6d09eb1133ba19f124b598901ee77139d9b7f7.jpg)
text_image
Access Point Settings Encryption key is set to:- XXXXXXXXX Select 'Yes' to confirm. Select 'No' to change. Yes No![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [Yes] - 2](/content/2026/05/796352/images/b6b47bd6d8fdeab1ed1f8b3c9731a0eafaa78fca80613991b3b3f0137a053a92.jpg)
- To re-enter the encryption key, select [No].
■ [Manual]
You can setup SSID, authentication type, encryption type, and encryption key manually.
Follow the on screen instructions and set manually.
- When you use 11n (5 GHz) for the wireless system between the Wireless LAN Adaptor and access point, please select [AES] for the encryption type.
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - ■ [Manual] - 1](/content/2026/05/796352/images/39caee01c9abcc470d115d2cbf298b314e92d8fa6316c470ea3405f0ee2ff05d.jpg)
flowchart
graph LR
A["Access Point Settings\nPlease input the SSID."] --> B["SSID Setting\nSSID is set to:-XXXXXXX\nSelect 'Yes' to confirm.\nSelect 'No' to change."]
B --> C["Authentication Type Settings\nConnection will be made with the following settings:-SSID : XXXXXXX\nPlease select the authentication type."]
C --> D["WPA2-PSK\nWPA-PSK\nShared key\nOpen"]
Update TV's software
Check for available software updates from the Panasonic website.
Select [Software Update]
| Network Setup | |
| Connection Test | |
| Network Type | Wired |
| Access Point Settings | |
| IP/DNS Settings | |
| Network Link Settings | |
| Software Update | Access |
| MAC Address | ab-cd-ef-gh-ij-kl |
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [Software Update] - 1](/content/2026/05/796352/images/2c7224f48b7f7d9e4253fea29e54d1e54d61919e7d90efd7d061668e52ec03b0.jpg)
- Follow the on screen instructions
Note

text_image
Network Setup : MAC Address ab-cd-ef-gh-ij-kl[MAC Address]
- MAC address is a unique address that identifies hardware in the network.
(for information only)
Using DLNA® features
- Ensure the preparation of media server, network connections and network settings are completed.
"Media server" (p. 91), "Network connections" (p. 92), [Network Setup] (p. 93 - 97)

text_image
MENU ASPECT TITLE i EXIT OPTION BACK/ RETURN DVD/VCR TV Panasonic TVTo return to TV

To return to the previous screen


1 Display icons of the feature

2 Select [Media Server]
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [Media Server] - 1](/content/2026/05/796352/images/2ef5a0b072b8da38aef6310be5fe424c2fb71737eb1f41f100a654d2a96ac9f7.jpg)
text_image
Media Server![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [Media Server] - 2](/content/2026/05/796352/images/96e882e6c0923332452e2479700498eb8eef21d7b969de868c5f22d3b746e4ba.jpg)
3 Select one of the media servers you want to access
Example : Media server list

text_image
Media Server SERVER1 SERVER2 SERVER3 OCA SELECT RETURN SELECTAvailable media servers
Total listed number

• To display the information of the highlighted media server

4 Select the file
Example : File list

text_image
Media Server SERVICES 10/01/2019-10-05 00:54 PPT WAT377 TOM FOS PPT0138 PPT0139 PPT0214 PPT0221 PPT0221 PPT0228 PPT0233 Y10025 Y10026 Y10027 Y10028 Y10029 Y10030 Y10031 Y10032 Y10033 Y10034 Y10035 Y10036 Y10037 Y10038 Y10039 Y10040 Y10041 Y10042 Y10043 Y10044 Y10045 Y10046 Y10047 Y10048 Y10049 Y10050 Y10051 Y10052 Y10053 Y10054 Y10055 Y10056 Y10057 Y10058 Y10059 Y10060 Y10061 Y10062 Y10063 Y10064 Y10065 Y10066 Y10067 Y10068 Y10069 Y10070 Y10071 Y10072 Y10073 Y10074 Y10075 Y10076 Y10077 Y10078 Y10079 Y10080 Y10081 Y10082 Y10083 Y10084 Y10085 Y10086 Y10087 Y10088 Y10089 Y10090 Y10091 Y10092 Y10093 Y10094 Y10095 Y10096 Y10097 Y10098 Y10099 Y1.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.
- Depending on the condition of media server, you may need to select the folder before selecting the file. - To display the information of the highlighted file

Note
• Non-playable files are also listed but cannot be selected.
- Turn the TV off, and then on again when changing or reconnecting the network connection.
- You can use the following buttons during playback. Set the position to "TV"


For photo file
[Single view] - Photos are displayed one at a time.
Example :

text_image
Single view Single view EXIT Select RETURN Stop Operation guide Rotate• To display / hide the operation guide

• To operate Single view

To the previous photo
To the next photo
Slideshow
Stop
(return to list)
- To return to list
BACK/RETURN

• To rotate 90°

(blue)
[Slideshow] - Slideshow will complete when all photos have been viewed within the list.
1 Select the photo file from the list for the first view 2 Start Slideshow

select
• To display / hide the operation guide




• To pause (return to Single view)

• To return to list
BACK/RETURN

For video file
Playback - Playback will start.
Example : Playback

text_image
19/02/2013 11:21 00:15:39 00:02:05 Manual skip EXIT RETURNOperation guide
Information banner
• To display / hide the operation guide and information banner

• To the previous content

• To the next content

• To change aspect

• To operate the playback

flowchart
graph TD
A["OK"] --> B["Pre"]
A --> C["sec"]
A --> D["bad"]
Rewind
[Manual skip]
- Press to skip forward about 30 seconds
- Press and hold to skip backward about 15 seconds
II/▶ Pause / Playback
Fast forward
Stop
• To return to list
BACK/RETURN

For music file
Playback - Playback will start
Example : Playback

text_image
My Song_9 My Favourite My Music 1 00:02.43 / 00:05.44 EXIT RETURN Operation guide• To display / hide the operation guide

• To operate the playback

ewind Pause / Playback Fast forward Stop
• To the previous track

• To the next track

- To return to list
BACK/RETURN

For DIGA Recorder
Control the DIGA Recorder
The screen of the DIGA Recorder will be displayed. You can control the functions of the DIGA Recorder with this TV remote control according to the operation guide.
Example :

text_image
DIRECT NAVIMATOR (Grouppc Files) All Not Available Movie Social/Commerce Scelta Video (AVOC) Liberty TV & TV Panel Guide/View Bibel TV: Bibel TV das Gespruch 10.00000000 Bibel 10.00000000 Bibel 10.00000000 Bibel 10.00000000 Bibel 10.00000000 Bibel 10.00000000 Bibel 10.00000000 Bibel 10.00000011 Bibel 10.00000112 Bibel 10.00000113 Bibel 10.00000114 Bibel 10.00000115 Bibel 10.00000116 Bibel 10.00000117 Bibel 10.00000118 Bibel 10.00000119 Bibel 10.00000120 Bibel 10.00000121 Bibel 10.00000122 Bibel 10.00000123 Bibel 10.00000124 Bibel 10.00000125 Bibel 10.00000126 Bibel 10.00000127 Bibel 10.00000128 Bibel 10.00000129 Bibel 10.00000130 Bibel 10.00000131 Bibel 10.00000132 Bibel 10.00000133 Bibel 10.00000134 Bibel 10.00000135 Bibel 10.00000136 Bibel 10.00000137 Bibel 10.00000138 Bibel 10.00000139 Bibel 10.00000140 Bibel 10.55555555 Bibel 15.55555556 Bibel 25.55555557 Bibel 35.55555558 Bibel 45.55555559 Bibel 55.5555556- Before operating, register this TV on the DIGA Recorder.
- For details, read the manual of the DIGA Recorder.
Option menu for each content
Setup the settings for Photo, Video and Music file operations.
1 Display the option menu

2 Select [Slideshow Settings], [Video Setup] or [Music Setup]
| Option Menu |
| Slideshow Settings |
| Video Setup |
| Music Setup |

3 Select the items and set
| Slideshow Settings | |
| Transition Effect | Fade |
| Interval | 5 seconds |
| Repeat | On |
| Back Ground Music | |
| Video Setup Menu | |
| Video Preview | On |
| Repeat | Off |
| Music Setup Menu | |
| Repeat | One |

select
access / store
| Menu | Item Adjustments / Configurations (alternatives) | |
| Slideshow Settings | Transition Effect | Selects the transition effect for switching the photo during the slideshow [Off] / [Fade] / [Slide] / [Dissolve] / [Motion] / [Random][Fade] : The next photo fades in gradually.[Slide] : The next photo slides and appears from the left side.[Dissolve] : Each photo is dissolved when switching to the next photo.[Motion] : Each photo is displayed with an effect of enlarging, reducing, moving up or moving down.[Random] : Each transition is selected at random. |
| Interval | Selects slideshow interval[5] / [10] / [15] / [30] / [60] / [90] / [120] (seconds)This function is not available when [Transition Effect] is set to [Motion]. | |
| Repeat Slideshow repeat | [Off] / [On] | |
| Back Ground Music | Selects the back ground music during Photo mode [Off] / [Type1] / [Type2] / [Type3] | |
| Video Setup | Video Preview | Sets to start the preview of the title or scene in the thumbnail screen [Off] / [On]Image may not be displayed for an instant in the thumbnail screen. Set the preview [Off] to resolve this. |
| Repeat Playback repeat | within the selected file [Off] / [On] | |
| Music Setup | Repeat | Playback repeat [Off] / [Folder] / [One][Folder] : Playback repeat within the selected folder[One] : Playback repeat of the selected one file |
Audio output settings (for video contents)
You can enjoy the multi-channel sound via an amplifier connected to DIGITAL AUDIO OUT or HDMI2 (ARC function) terminal.
- To confirm or change the current sound status "Confirm or change the current status" (p. 86)
1 Display the menu
MENU

2 Select [Sound]
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [Sound] - 1](/content/2026/05/796352/images/f8ccecb6b9deb372326ffcdaf41eae3de20a9c43e7fbfcd4c5fd327d08de1e4e.jpg)
text_image
VIERA Main Menu Picture Sound Timer Setup![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [Sound] - 2](/content/2026/05/796352/images/86ad6813c40d42b2a26548f557a8c7e7a831cd0928998cb46f71fdbf53f56f0e.jpg)
①select ②access
3 Select [SPDIF Selection] and set
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [SPDIF Selection] and set - 1](/content/2026/05/796352/images/d8e6826b0e7742730a9096a3af922d0152e0cd07d97be10982bb5ad49e95e04b.jpg)
text_image
SPDIF Selection Auto Reset to Defaults Reset![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [SPDIF Selection] and set - 2](/content/2026/05/796352/images/fabeb013e1949e1db77d29a9f28a6a0bf959cd496cdddb61d7b4a43ee4796acb.jpg)
select
access / store
| Menu | Item Adjustments / Configurations (alternatives) | |
| Sound | SPDIF Selection | SPDIF : A standard audio transfer file formatSelects the initial setting for digital audio output signal from DIGITAL AUDIO OUT and HDMI2 (ARC function) terminals [Auto] / [PCM][Auto] : Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby Digital and HE-AAC (48 kHz) multi-channel are output as Dolby Digital Bitstream.MPEG is output as PCM.[PCM] : Digital output signal is fixed to PCM. |
VIERA Connect
You can access VIERA Connect and enjoy various network contents.
• VIERA Connect requires a broadband internet connection. Dial-up internet connections cannot be used.
- Ensure the network connections and network settings are completed. ➤ “Network connections” (p. 92), [Network Setup] (p. 93 - 97)
- For details about VIERA Connect operation "Using "VIERA Connect" (p. 18)
- Setup menu (Items in [Setup] may change without notice.)
| Customize HomeScreen | Changes the position of each services on VIERA Connect home screen |
| My Account | Confirms or removes the account information of the TV you entered on VIERA Connect |
| Lock Sets to restrict access to some services | |
| Beep Sets beep sound On | or Off when operating VIERA Connect |
| Notices Displays the information of VIERA Connect | |
Note
- Be sure to update the software when a software update notice is displayed on the TV screen. If the software is not updated, you will not be able to use VIERA Connect.
You can update the software later manually → [Software Update] in [Network Setup] (p. 97)
• VIERA Connect home screen is subject to change without notice. - The services through VIERA Connect are operated by their respective service providers, and service may be discontinued either temporarily or permanently without notice. Therefore, Panasonic will make no warranty for the content or the continuity of the services.
- Some content may be inappropriate for some viewers.
- Some content may only be available for specific countries and may be presented in specific languages.
- Depending on the connection environment, the internet connection may be slow or may not be successful.
- During the operation, audio signal is output from AV1, AUDIO OUT, DIGITAL AUDIO OUT and HDMI2 (ARC function) terminals. But no video signals are output. AV1 can output audio signal if [AV1 out] is set to [Monitor] in the Setup Menu (p. 45). To use HDMI2 with ARC function, connect an amplifier that has ARC function (p. 103) and set to use theatre speakers (p. 109).
- You can restrict access to VIERA Connect [Child Lock] (p. 64)
- Turn the TV off, and then on again when changing or reconnecting the network connection.
Link Functions (Q-Link / VIERA Link)
Q-Link connects the TV and DVD Recorder / VCR, and enables easy recording, playback, etc. (p. 104) VIERA Link (HDAVI Control™) connects the TV and the equipment with VIERA Link function, and enables easy control, convenient recording, playback, energy saving, creation of a home theatre, etc., without complicated setting. (p. 105 - 109) You can use Q-Link and VIERA Link functions together.
- This TV supports “HDAVI Control 5” function. But available features are depending on the connected equipment’s version of HDAVI Control. Please refer to the manual of the equipment to confirm the version.
- VIERA Link features may be available even with other manufacturers' equipment supporting HDMI CEC.
Summary of Q-Link and VIERA Link features
Q-Link (SCART connection only)
| Features\Connected equipment | DVD Recorder / VCR with Q-Link function |
| Analogue channel download | ○ |
| Easy playback | ○ |
| Power on link | ○ |
| Power off link | ○ |
| Direct TV Recording | ○ |
Connection


SCART cable

DVD Recorder / VCR with Q-Link function
- Use a fully wired SCART cable.
- Connect the DVD Recorder / VCR supporting Q-Link to the TV's AV1 terminal via a SCART cable.
VIERA Link (HDMI connection only)
| Features\Connected equipment | DIGA Recorder with VIERA Link function | DVD Player / Blu-ray Disc Player with VIERA Link function | HD Video Camera / LUMIX Camera with VIERA Link function |
| Analogue channel download — — — | |||
| Easy playback | ○ | ○ | ○ |
| Power on link | ○ | ○ | ○ |
| Power off link | ○ | ○ | ○ |
| Reduce unnecessary power consumption in standby | ○*3 | ○*3 | — |
| Auto standby for unnecessary equipment | ○*3 | ○*3 | — |
| Pause Live TV programme | ○*3 *4 | — | — |
| Direct TV Recording | ○*3 | — | — |
| Control the menu of the connected equipment by VIERA remote control | ○*1 | ○*1 | ○*1 |
| Speaker control — — — |
Connection




DIGA Recorder / DVD Player /
Blu-ray Disc Player /
HD Video Camera / LUMIX Camera
with VIERA Link function
- Use a fully wired HDMI compliant cable.
- Connect the equipment supporting VIERA Link to the TV's HDMI1, HDMI2, HDMI3 or HDMI4 terminal via an HDMI cable.
- For information about using HDMI cables for connecting Panasonic HD Video Camera or LUMIX Camera, read the manual of the equipment.
VIERA Link (HDMI and SCART connections)
| Features\Connected equipment | DIGA Recorder with VIERA Link function |
| Analogue channel download | ○ |
| Easy playback | ○ |
| Power on link | ○ |
| Power off link | ○ |
| Reduce unnecessary power consumption in standby | ○*3 |
| Auto standby for unnecessary equipment | ○*3 |
| Pause Live TV programme | ○*2*4 |
| Direct TV Recording | ○*2 |
| Control the menu of the connected equipment by VIERA remote control | ○*1 |
| Speaker control – |
Connection


SCART cable

DIGA Recorder with VIERA Link function
- Use a fully wired HDMI compliant cable.
- Connect the equipment supporting VIERA Link to the TV's HDMI1, HDMI2, HDMI3 or HDMI4 terminal via an HDMI cable.
- Use a fully wired SCART cable.
- Connect the equipment supporting VIERA Link to the TV's AV1 terminal via a SCART cable.
VIERA Link (HDMI and Audio out connections)
| Features\Connected equipment | Player theatre with VIERA Link function | Blu-ray Disc theatre with VIERA Link function | Amplifier with VIERA Link function |
| Analogue channel download --- | |||
| Easy playback | *5 | *5 | - |
| Power on link | - | ||
| Power off link | |||
| Reduce unnecessary power consumption in standby | - | *3 | - |
| Auto standby for unnecessary equipment | *3 *6 | *3 *6 | *3 |
| Pause Live TV programme --- | |||
| Direct TV Recording --- | |||
| Control the menu of the connected equipment by VIERA remote control | *1 | *1 | - |
| Speaker control |

flowchart
graph TD
A["Connection"] --> B["HDMI cable"]
B --> C["SCART cable"]
C --> D["SCART cable"]
D --> E["Player theatre / Blu-ray Disc theatre with VIERA Link function"]
E --> F["Speaker system"]
C --> G["Player theatre / Blu-ray Disc theatre with VIERA Link function"]
G --> H["Speaker system"]
C --> I["Player theatre / Blu-ray Disc theatre with VIERA Link function"]
I --> J["Speaker system"]
C --> K["Player theatre / Blu-ray Disc theatre with VIERA Link function"]
K --> L["Speaker system"]
C --> M["Player theatre / Blu-ray Disc theatre with VIERA Link function"]
M --> N["Speaker system"]
C --> O["Player theatre / Blu-ray Disc theatre with VIERA Link function"]
O --> P["Speaker system"]
style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
style D fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
style E fill:#ffc,stroke:#333
style F fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
style G fill:#ffc,stroke:#333
style H fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
style I fill:#ffc,stroke:#333
style J fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
style K fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
style L fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
style M fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
style N fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
style O fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
HD Video Camera / LUMIX Camera with VIERA Link function
- Use fully wired HDMI compliant cable.
- Connect the equipment supporting VIERA Link to the TV's HDMI2, HDMI3 or HDMI4 terminal via an HDMI cable.
• Use fully wired SCART cable. - If you use a SCART cable for audio output, connect the equipment supporting VIERA Link to the TV's AV1 terminal and set [AV1 out] to [Monitor] in the Setup Menu (p. 45).
- Use the optical digital audio cable, RCA cable or SCART cable for audio output from the TV.
*1 : Available with the equipment which has "HDAVI Control 2 or later" function.
*2 : Available with the equipment which has "HDAVI Control 3 or later" function.
*3 : Available with the equipment which has "HDAVI Control 4 or later" function.
*4 : Available with DIGA Recorder which has HDD.
*5: While playing a disc
*6 : Except for watching a disc
*7: If the connected equipment has "HDAVI Control 5" function, you do not have to use this audio cable (Optical digital audio cable, RCA cable or SCART cable). In this case, connect the equipment to the TV's HDMI2 terminal via an HDMI cable.
VIERA Link Control of compatible equipment ([VIERA Link Control]→p. 107)
- Table below displays maximum number of compatible equipment that can be controlled by VIERA Link Control.
This includes connections to equipment already connected to the TV.
For example, DIGA Recorder connected to Amplifier which is connected to the TV via an HDMI cable.
| Type of the equipment Maximum number | |
| Recorder (DIGA Recorder, etc.) 3 | |
| Player (DVD Player, Blu-ray Disc Player, HD Video Camera, LUMIX Camera, Digital Camera, Player theatre, Blu-ray Disc theatre, etc.) | 3 |
| Audio system (Player theatre, Blu-ray Disc theatre, Amplifier, etc.) 1 | |
| Tuner (Set top box, etc.) 4 |
Q-Link
Preparations
- Connect the DVD Recorder / VCR with the following logos :
“Q-Link”, “NEXTVIEWLINK”, “DATA LOGIC (a trademark of Metz Corporation)”, “Easy Link (a trademark of Philips Corporation)”, “Megalogic (a trademark of Grundig Corporation)” or “SMARTLINK (a trademark of Sony Corporation)”
• Q-Link connection →(p. 102) - Use fully wired SCART cable.
- Set up the DVD Recorder / VCR. Read the manual of the recorder.
• Q-Link terminal setup in the Setup Menu →[AV1 out] (p. 45) - Download Analogue channel setting "Analogue channel download" (see below)
Features available
Analogue channel download
Analogue channel settings can be downloaded to a recorder with an analogue tuner (where Analogue is still broadcast). Digital channel settings are not downloaded.
• To download the Analogue channel settings
→ [Q-Link Download] (p. 46) or [Auto Setup] in Analogue mode (p. 53) or "Auto Setup" - when first using the TV (p. 13)
Direct TV Recording - What you see is What you record
Recording the current programme on a DVD Recorder / VCR immediately.

text_image
GUIDE DIRECT TV REC EXIT DIRECT TV REC• Available conditions :
| Picture source Mode Recording from | ||
| Analogue | TV TV monitor out | |
| AV Recorder's tuner | ||
| freesat, DVB, Other Sat. / Satellite TV TV monitor out | ||
| AV (watching recorder's tuner) AV Recorder's tuner | ||
| AV (watching recorder's external input) | AV Recorder's external input | |
| AV (watching TV's external input) AV TV monitor out | ||
- When Direct TV Recording is performed, the recorder is automatically turned on if it is in Standby mode.
- Changing channel or turning off the TV is available while the recorder is recording from its own tuner.
- Changing channel is not available while the recorder is recording from the TV tuner.
■ To stop recording

flowchart
graph LR
A["GUIDE"] --> B["Unlock the tuner"]
B --> C["Tuner Locked\nPress EXIT to unlock and stop recording"]
C --> D["EXIT"]
Power on link and Easy playback
When the DVD Recorder / VCR starts playback or the direct navigator / function menu for the equipment is activated, the TV is turned on and the input mode is switched automatically so that you can view the content. (Only when the TV is in Standby mode.)
Power off link
When the TV is set to Standby mode, the recorder is also automatically set to Standby. (Only when the videocassette or disc is not active.)
- This function will work even if the TV enters Standby mode automatically by auto power standby function.
Note
104 • Some recorders are not compatible. Read the manual of the recorder.
*Enjoy additional HDMI Inter-Operability with Panasonic products which have “HDAVI Control” function. This TV supports “HDAVI Control 5” function.
Connections to the equipment (DIGA Recorder, HD Video Camera, Player theatre, Amplifier, etc.) with HDMI and SCART cables allow you to interface them automatically (p. 102, 103).
These features are limited to models incorporating "HDAVI Control" and "VIERA Link".
- Some functions are not available depending on the equipment's version of HDAVI Control. Please confirm the connected equipment's version of HDAVI Control.
- VIERA Link “HDAVI Control”, based on the control functions provided by HDMI which is an industry standard known as HDMI CEC (Consumer Electronics Control), is a unique function that we have developed and added.
As such, its operation with other manufacturers' equipment that supports HDMI CEC cannot be guaranteed.
- Please refer to individual manuals for other manufacturers' equipment supporting VIERA Link function.
- For information about applicable Panasonic equipment, consult your local Panasonic dealer or refer to www.panasonic.co.uk
Preparations
- Connect the equipment that supports VIERA Link.
• VIERA Link connection →(p. 102, 103)
Use a fully wired HDMI compliant cable. Non-HDMI-compliant cables cannot be utilised.
Recommended Panasonic HDMI cables' part numbers :
- RP-CDHS15 (1.5 m) • RP-CDHS30 (3.0 m) • RP-CDHS50 (5.0 m)
- Use a fully wired SCART cable.
- Set up the connected equipment. Read the manual of the equipment.
- For optimal recording, the settings of the recorder may need to be changed. For details, read the manual of the recorder.
- Download Analogue channel setting "Analogue channel download" (see below)
- Set [VIERA Link] [On] in the Setup Menu → [VIERA Link] (p. 45)
- Set up the TV
→ After connection, turn the equipment on and then switch the TV on.
Select the input mode to HDMI1, HDMI2, HDMI3 or HDMI4 (p. 31), and make sure that an image is displayed correctly.
This setup should be done each time when the following conditions occur :
- for the first time
- when adding or reconnecting equipment
- when changing setup
Features available
Analogue channel download
Analogue channel settings can be downloaded to a recorder with an analogue tuner (where Analogue is still broadcast). Digital channel settings are not downloaded.
• To download the Analogue channel settings
→ [Q-Link Download] (p. 46) or [Auto Setup] in Analogue mode (p. 53) or “Auto Setup” - when first using the TV (p. 13)
Easy playback
Automatic Input switching - When the connected equipment is operated (during playback or menu operations, etc.), the input mode is switched automatically. When playback is stopped or menus are exited, the input mode returns to the original setting.
Power on link
When the connected equipment starts playback or the direct navigator / function menu for the equipment is activated, the TV is automatically turned on and the input mode is switched automatically so that you can view the content. (Only when the TV is in Standby mode.)
Power off link
When the TV is set to Standby mode, the connected equipment is also automatically set to Standby.
- This function will work even if the TV enters Standby mode automatically by auto power standby function.
Reduce unnecessary power consumption in standby [Standby Power Save]
Set Standby Power Save [On] in the Setup Menu to use this function ▶[Standby Power Save] (p. 45)
The power consumption in Standby mode of the connected equipment is controlled in synchronization with the TV On / Off state.
When the TV is set to Standby mode, the connected equipment is automatically set to Standby and the power consumption in Standby mode of the connected equipment is automatically minimised.
When the TV is turned on and the connected equipment is still in Standby mode, the power consumption of the connected equipment is increased to reduce the startup time.
- This function is effective if the connected equipment can change the power consumption in Standby mode and is set to higher consumption.
Auto standby for unnecessary equipment [Intelligent Auto Standby]
Set Intelligent Auto Standby [On (With reminder)] or [On (No reminder)] in the Setup Menu to use this function ➞[Intelligent Auto Standby] (p. 46)
When the TV is On, non-watched or non-used connected equipment goes into Standby mode automatically to reduce power consumption. For example, when the input mode is switched from HDMI, the connected equipment will go into Standby mode / when Speaker Selection is changed to [TV], the Player theatre will go into Standby mode (except when watching a disc).
- If you select [On (With reminder)], the on screen message will be displayed before the connected equipment turns to Standby.
- This function may not work properly depending on the connected equipment. If required, set to [Off].
Direct TV Recording - What you see is What you record [Direct TV Rec]
Recording the current programme on a DIGA Recorder immediately.
- If you connect a variety of recorders including other manufacturers' recorders at the same time, please connect the DIGA Recorder to the TV's lower HDMI terminal number. For example, if you use HDMI1 and HDMI2 for two recorders, connect the DIGA Recorder to HDMI1.
- If Direct TV Recording does not operate, check the settings and the equipment “Summary of Q-Link and VIERA Link features” (p. 102, 103), “Preparations” (p. 105)
- If you wish to record a programme that the DIGA Recorder does not support, a SCART connection is required and the programme is recorded by Q-Link function (p. 104).
- Depending on the programme, a SCART connection may be required to record.
- Changing channel or turning off the TV is available while the recorder is recording from its own tuner.
- Changing channel is not available while the recorder is recording from the TV tuner.
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Direct TV Recording - What you see is What you record [Direct TV Rec] - 1](/content/2026/05/796352/images/6e5541ade7c697f95e81d076f30ff55c8b03e212a20d86313918f4f7e2d74045.jpg)
text_image
GUIDE INECTVREC IRK EXIT 1 21
Display [VIERA Link Menu]
VIERA
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Display [VIERA Link Menu] - 1](/content/2026/05/796352/images/a6b01e94058351243e7d4fc92d4feafcdd3629b0e6c1567574dd381d809ff3d1.jpg)
2
Select [Direct TV Rec] and start recording
| VIERA Link Menu | |
| Pause Live TV | Start |
| Direct TV Rec | Start |
| VIERA Link Control | Recorder |
| Speaker Selection | Home Cinema |
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [Direct TV Rec] and start recording - 1](/content/2026/05/796352/images/5975f5518611f2e6193be2d21ff668313f79733c2748c27cec8854a1023092df.jpg)
select
access / start
- You can also start recording directly. DIRECT TV REC
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [Direct TV Rec] and start recording - 2](/content/2026/05/796352/images/4d36d459acd40d7a687864bf5e022c8e45e7c53f02978073d3b204284f07be25.jpg)
■ To stop recording
Select [Stop] in [Direct TV Rec]
| VIERA Link Menu | |
| Pause Live TV | Start |
| Direct TV Rec | Stop |
| VIERA Link Control | Recorder |
| Speaker Selection | Home Cinema |

select
access / stop
- You can also stop recording directly.
Unlock the tuner
GUIDE


Tuner Locked
Press EXIT to unlock and stop recording
EXIT

Pause Live TV programme [Pause Live TV]
You can pause the live TV programme and resume the programme later.
The live TV programme will be recorded on HDD of the connected DIGA Recorder.
• This function is available with a DIGA Recorder which has HDD.
- If you connect a variety of recorders including other manufacturers' recorders at the same time, please connect the DIGA Recorder which has HDD to the TV's lower HDMI terminal number. For example, if you use HDMI1 and HDMI2 for two recorders, connect the DIGA Recorder which has HDD to HDMI1.
- If Pause Live TV does not operate, check the settings and the equipment
→ "Summary of Q-Link and VIERA Link features" (p. 102, 103), "Preparations" (p. 105)
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Pause Live TV programme [Pause Live TV] - 1](/content/2026/05/796352/images/32b293fbfb3475c87a59ea3346589cb4da06c51ac13016398e6784272c803859.jpg)
text_image
INPUT TV INX OK OPTION1 Display [VIERA Link Menu]
VIERA
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Display [VIERA Link Menu] - 1](/content/2026/05/796352/images/064fa841f08948e76fbc3bf980b25d1f459c0c83a1e696f3e763975a22823222.jpg)
2 Select [Pause Live TV] and pause
The TV picture will be paused.
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [Pause Live TV] and pause - 1](/content/2026/05/796352/images/e7b3e7990865368cf25ba1e042713a1688d5369cd48b86b80ac8d1618bd84d37.jpg)
text_image
VIERA Link Menu Pause Live TV Start Direct TV Rec Start VIERA Link Control Recorder Speaker Selection Home Cinema![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [Pause Live TV] and pause - 2](/content/2026/05/796352/images/b24955dd63f59288fd5ecbf70974445299af006791a0352b0664a0156d6af1d2.jpg)
• Live TV programme is recorded on HDD from where it was paused.
- If the paused TV picture disappears after a few minutes.
OPTION
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [Pause Live TV] and pause - 3](/content/2026/05/796352/images/b6f045075653adc59039282a3aece30fb3411ce927fe2909f49c00685ecbf157.jpg)
(the paused picture will be restored)
- Follow the operation guide to operate Pause Live TV function.
■ To operate Pause Live TV

flowchart
graph TD
A["OK"] --> B["search backward"]
A --> C["pause"]
A --> D["search forward"]
A --> E["playback"]
A --> F["stop"]
- Operations may be different depending on the recorder. In this case, follow the operation guide or read the manual of the recorder.
- If you stop playback, the recorded programme will be deleted from HDD.
■ To return to Live TV (stop playback of Pause Live TV / cancel pause)
Select [Yes]

flowchart
graph LR
A["TV"] --> B["Pause Live TV"]
B --> C{Stop Pause Live TV?}
C -->|Yes| D["OK"]
C -->|No| E["Stop"]
- If you stop playback or cancel pause, the recorded programme will be deleted from HDD.
Control the menu of the connected equipment by VIERA remote control [VIERA Link Control]
You can control some functions of the connected equipment with this TV remote control (point the remote control at the TV's signal receiver).
- If you cannot operate the menu of the connected equipment, check the settings and the equipment
→ "Summary of Q-Link and VIERA Link features" (p. 102, 103), "Preparations" (p. 105) - For details of the operations for the connected equipment, read the manual of the equipment.
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Control the menu of the connected equipment by VIERA remote control [VIERA Link Control] - 1](/content/2026/05/796352/images/971ff2953f2e2eae49cc0d9b9093bfd4d364a04d61445ddeaceff98927382cf8.jpg)
text_image
UNK OK1 Display [MERA Link Menu]
VIERA
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Display [MERA Link Menu] - 1](/content/2026/05/796352/images/8ab52a4e554b3ee45e0ab0eb74a7bb41fedc6ccfda20fdf8cd12d54554b3e5c2.jpg)
2 Select [VIERA Link Control]
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [VIERA Link Control] - 1](/content/2026/05/796352/images/36fd124dfef7132e3b2bc26d06381297324bf7f5148400692ec4d0662c31a8da.jpg)
text_image
VIERA Link Menu Pause Live TV Start Direct TV Rec Start VIERA Link Control Recorder Speaker Selection Home Cinema![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [VIERA Link Control] - 2](/content/2026/05/796352/images/e9b2adc9c7edc2e7f56f8386941c29c4a8c09ddfd223be3eab61134e17d82914.jpg)
3
Select the equipment you want to access
The type of the connected equipment is displayed. Select the type of the equipment and access.

text_image
VIERA Link Menu Pause Live TV Start Direct TV Rec Start VIERA Link Control Recorder Speaker Selection Home Cinema[Recorder] / [Player] / [Home Cinema] / [Video Camera] / [LUMIX] / [Digital Camera] / [Other]
- You can also access directly by using VIERA TOOLS "How to Use VIERA TOOLS" (p. 40)
- The displayed item may vary depending on the connected equipment.
• [Home Cinema] means Player theatre, Blu-ray Disc theatre or Recorder theatre.
• [Other] means Tuner set top box.
The menu of the accessed equipment (Input mode will be changed automatically)
4
Operate the menu of the equipment
Available VIERA remote control buttons : (depending on the connected equipment)

text_image
1 Set the position to "TV" DVD/VCR TV 2 Follow the operation guide • To display the operation guide OPTION If other manufacturers' equipment is accessed, Setup / Contents Selection menu may be displayed. • When the key words are displayed on colour bar (red) (green) (yellow) (blue) Note • Some operations may not be available depending on the equipment. In this case use its own remote control to operate the equipment.
If multiple recorders or players are connected

text_image
VIERA Link Menu Pause Live TV Direct TV Rec VIERA Link Control Speaker Selection Start Start Recorder2 Home Cinema[Recorder1-3 / Player1-3]
The number is given from the TV's lower HDMI terminal number connected to the same type equipment. For example, two recorders to HDMI2 and HDMI3, in this case the recorder connected to HDMI2 is displayed as [Recorder1], and the recorder connected to HDMI3 is displayed as [Recorder2].

If you access non-VIERA Link equipment

text_image
VIERA Link Menu Pause Live TV Start Direct TV Rec Start VIERA Link Control Recorder Speaker Selection Home CinemaThe type of the connected equipment is displayed. You can access the menu of the equipment. But you cannot operate it. Use its own remote control to operate the equipment.
Speaker control [Speaker Selection]
You can control the home theatre speakers with this TV remote control (point the remote control at the TV's signal receiver).
- If you cannot operate, check the settings and the equipment
“Summary of Q-Link and VIERA Link features” (p. 102, 103), “Preparations” (p. 105)
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Speaker control [Speaker Selection] - 1](/content/2026/05/796352/images/fb13a8c312a2246d2186e92143d23a6d416df854554dbb117430b20e9c918f86.jpg)
natural_image
Front view of a Panasonic TV remote control with no visible text or symbols on the device itself.1
Display [VIERA Link Menu]
VIERA
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Display [VIERA Link Menu] - 1](/content/2026/05/796352/images/fc9628a93c21922a035d220215be360f603ac0749f08a4f8e2f594401244c494.jpg)
2
Select [Speaker Selection]
| VIERA Link Menu | |
| Pause Live TV | Start |
| Direct TV Rec | Start |
| VIERA Link Control | Recorder |
| Speaker Selection | Home Cinema |
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Select [Speaker Selection] - 1](/content/2026/05/796352/images/0aaf8c86cfe1e5190c3e1697ebefb385185b9550a33283c2060b8ad74bf4beaa.jpg)
3
Set to [Home Cinema] or [TV]
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - Set to [Home Cinema] or [TV] - 1](/content/2026/05/796352/images/7f2c88b636e39e14f29644d2a9143b0c311258457d7cc5392f122671a197980c.jpg)
[Home Cinema]
The Player theatre, Blu-ray Disc theatre or Amplifier will be automatically turned on if it is in Standby mode and the sound will be output from theatre speakers connected to the equipment.
• Volume up / down
• Mute
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - [Home Cinema] - 1](/content/2026/05/796352/images/ca8367367a89e648227b39acb6825268e68f44588781c123a1d6791047e9ff41.jpg)
![PANASONIC TX-P65VT30B - [Home Cinema] - 2](/content/2026/05/796352/images/e586a678edf5160ee649b6b1ff5e2d42b364f766838cd98608f5af32c574ae3a.jpg)
• The sound of the TV speakers is muted.
- When the equipment is turned off, the TV speakers will be activated.
[TV]
TV speakers are active.
Multi-channel sound
If you wish to enjoy multi-channel sound (e.g. Dolby Digital 5.1ch) via an Amplifier, connect the Amplifier to the TV with an HDMI cable and an Optical digital audio cable (p. 103), and then select "Home Cinema". If your Amplifier has "HDAVI Control 5" function, you only need to connect with an HDMI cable. In this case, connect your Amplifier to the TV's HDMI2 terminal.
To enjoy the sound from the DIGA Recorder in multi-channel sound, connect an HDMI cable from the DIGA Recorder to the Amplifier (p. 103).
Note
• These functions may not work properly depending on the connected equipment.
• Image or sound may not be available for the first few seconds when input mode is switched.
- Easy playback may be available by using the remote control for Player theatre, Blu-ray Disc theatre or Amplifier. Read the manual of the equipment.
- "HDAVI Control 5" is the newest standard (current as of December, 2010) for HDAVI Control compatible equipment. This standard is compatible with conventional HDAVI equipment.
• To confirm this TV's version of HDAVI Control ➕ [System Information] (p. 47)
External Equipment
These diagrams show our recommendations for connection of your TV to various pieces of equipment. For other connections, consult the instructions for each piece of equipment, the table (p. 112), and the specifications (p. 130, 131).

flowchart
graph TD
A["Satellite dish"] --> B["Satellite cable"]
B --> C["Cable"]
C --> D["Cable TV box"]
D --> E["To record / playback"]
E --> F["RF cable"]
E --> G["Fully wired SCART cable"]
E --> H["DVD Recorder / VCR"]
I["Rear of the TV"] --> J["Satellite adaptor (supplied)"]
J --> K["SCART adaptor (supplied)"]
K --> L["Composite adaptor (supplied)"]
L --> M["HDMI equipment"]
N["External Equipment"] --> O["RF adaptor (supplied)"]
O --> P["SCART adaptor (supplied)"]
P --> Q["Composite adaptor (supplied)"]
Q --> R["HDMI 117"]
S["To watch satellites broadcasts"] --> T["Satellite cable"]
U["To watch cable broadcasts"] --> V["Satellite cable"]
W["To watch DVDs"] --> X["Component adaptor (supplied)"]
X --> Y["(Viewing)"]
X --> Z["(Listening)"]
Y --> AA["DVD Player"]
Z --> AB["Composite adaptor (supplied)"]
AB --> AC["HDMI equipment"]
AD["Recorder / Player"] --> AE["Fully wired HDMI compliant cable"]
AF["Camcorder"] --> AG["HDMI connection (p. 117)"]

flowchart
graph TD
A["Satellite Ethernet"] --> B["Service Port"]
B --> C["Remote Control Panel"]
C --> D["Network (wired)"]
D --> E["Less than 10 cm"]
E --> F["LAN cable"]
F --> G["Hub or Router"]
G --> H["Modem"]
H --> I["Internet"]
I --> J["West"]
D --> K["Ferrite core - Large size (supplied)"]
K --> L["Installing the Ferrite core"]
L --> M["Pull back the tabs (in two places)"]
L --> N["Wind the cable twice"]
L --> O["Press the cable through and close"]
P["USB 1"] --> Q["USB 3 (HDD)"]
R["USB 2"] --> S["USB cable"]
T["USB 3"] --> U["USB HDD"]
V["Wireless LAN Adaptor"] --> W["USB devices"]
X["To listen with speakers"] --> Y["Optical digital audio adaptor (supplied)"]
Y --> Z["Optical digital audio cable"]
Z --> AA["or"]
AA --> AB["RCA cable"]
AB --> AC["Amplifier with speaker system"]
AD["Audio adaptor (supplied)"] --> AE["Audio adaptor"]
AE --> AF["Composite adaptor (supplied)"]
AG["Compcorder / Game equipment"] --> AH["(Viewing)"]
AH --> AI["(Listening)"]
AI --> AJ["Game equipment"]

text_image
Headphones Less than 10 cm (M3 stereo mini plug) Ferrite core - Small size (supplied) Rear of the TV Installing the Ferrite core ① Pull back the tab ② Open Wind the cable twice ③ Press the cable through and close• To adjust volume
→ [Headphone Volume] (p. 44)
Types of connectable equipment to each terminal
| Recording / Playback (equipment) | Terminal | |||||||
AV1*4![]() | AV2*4 | COMPONENT*4 | AUDIO OUT*4 | AUDIO OUT*4 | DIGITAL AUDIO OUT*4 | ETHERNET![]() | HDMI 1-4 | |
| To record / playback videocassettes / DVDs (VCR / DVD Recorder) | ○ | |||||||
| To watch 3D contents (Blu-ray Disc Player) | ○ | |||||||
| To watch cable broadcasts (Cable TV box) | ○ | ○ | ○*1 | |||||
| To watch DVDs (DVD Player) | ○ | ○ | ○ | ○ | ||||
| To watch camcorder images (Video camera) | ○ | ○ | ○ | |||||
| To play games (Game equipment) | ○ | ○ | ○ | |||||
| To use amplifier with speaker system | ○ | ○ | ○*2 | |||||
| To use network services | ○ | ○ | ||||||
| USB HDD Recording | ○*3 | |||||||
| Q-Link | ○ | |||||||
| VIERA Link | ○(with HDMI) | ○ | ||||||
| Direct TV Recording | ○ | ○ | ||||||
○: Recommended Connection
*1 : Use HDMI1 for automatic input switching.
*2 : Use HDMI2 for connecting an amplifier. This connection is applicable when using an amplifier that has ARC (Audio Return Channel) function.
*3 : Use USB 3 port for connecting the USB HDD.
*4 : To connect the equipment, the terminal adaptor (supplied) is necessary.
Technical Information
Auto Aspect
The optimum size and aspect can be chosen automatically, and you can enjoy finer images. (p. 22)
Aspect Control Signal
[WIDE] will appear in the top left of the screen if a Widescreen signal (WSS) or a Control signal through SCART / HDMI terminal is found.
The aspect will switch to the appropriate 16:9 or 14:9 widescreen ratio. This function will work in any aspect mode.
| Input terminal Input signal format | Aspect Control Signal | ||
| Widescreen signal (WSS) | Control signal through SCART (pin8) / HDMI terminal | ||
| RF | DVB | ○ | |
| PAL I | ○ | ||
| PAL 525/60 6.0 MHz – | |||
| M.NTSC 6.0 MHz – | |||
| Satellite | freesat, Other Sat. / Satellite | ○ | |
| AV1 / AV2 (Composite) | PAL | ○ | ○ |
| PAL 525/60 – | ○ | ||
| M.NTSC – | ○ | ||
| NTSC – | ○ | ||
| COMPONENT | 525 (480) / 60i, 60p – | ||
| 625 (576) / 50i, 50p | ○ | ||
| 750 (720) / 60p, 50p – | |||
| 1,125 (1,080) / 60i, 50i – | |||
| HDMI1HDMI2HDMI3HDMI4 | 525 (480) / 60i, 60p – | ○ | |
| 625 (576) / 50i, 50p – | ○ | ||
| 750 (720) / 60p, 50p – | ○ | ||
| 1,125 (1,080) / 60i, 50i – | ○ | ||
| 1,125 (1,080) / 60p, 50p, 24p | - | ○ | |
Auto mode
Auto mode determines the best aspect ratio to fill the screen. It does this using a four step process (WSS, Control signal through SCART / HDMI terminal, Letterbox detection or Justify to fill the screen). This process may take several minutes, depending on the darkness of the image.
Letterbox detection :
If black bands at the top and bottom of the screen are detected, Auto mode chooses the best ratio and expands the image to fill the screen.
If no aspect signals are detected, Auto mode enhances the image for optimum viewing pleasure.
Note
- The ratio varies depending on the programme, etc. If the ratio is out of the standard 16:9, black bands at the top and bottom of the screen may appear.
- If the screen size looks unusual when a widescreen-recorded programme is played back on a VCR, adjust the tracking of the VCR. Read the manual of the VCR.
Supported file format in Media Player and media servers
Photo
| Format File extension Image resolution (pixel) Details / Restrictions | |||
| JPEG | .jpg.mpo | 8 × 8to30,719 × 17,279 | DCF*1 and EXIF*2 standardsSub-sampling : 4:4:4, 4:2:2, 4:2:0Progressive JPEG is not supported. |
*1 : Design rule for Camera File system - unified standard established by Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association (JEITA)
*2 : Exchangeable Image File - image file format used by digital cameras
Video
| Container | File extension | Video codec | Audio codec Details / Restrictions | |
| SD-Video .mod | mod | MPEG1MPEG2 | MPEGDolby Digital | SD-Video Standard Ver. 1.3(Entertainment Video Profile)The data may not be available if a folder structure on the device is modified. |
| AVCHD .mts H.264 Dolby Digital | AVCHD Standard(including 3D videos recorded by the 3D-compatible Video Camera)The data may not be available if a folder structure on the device is modified. | |||
| AVI | .avi.divx | DIV3 DIV4DIVX DX50DIV6 XviDMPEG4 SP / ASP | MPEGMP3Dolby Digital | Certified to play DivX Plus HD video file in Media PlayerFor details of DivX ➔ “DivX” (p. 115) |
| MKV | .mkv | H.264 BP / MP / HP | MPEGMP3Dolby DigitalDTS core | |
| ASF | .asf.wmv | Windows Media Video Ver. 9VC-1 | WMA | Copy-protected files cannot be played back.WMA Pro and WMA Lossless are not supported. |
| MP4 | .mp4 | H.264 BP / MP / HP | AACMP3Dolby Digital | This TV supports this container recorded by Panasonic products.For details, read the manual of the products. |
| MOV | .mov | MotionJPEGH.264 BP / MP / HP | Linear PCM (RAW / TWOS / SOWT)AACMP3Dolby Digital | This TV supports Motion JPEG recorded by Panasonic LUMIX Camera*3.This TV is not available for playing back Motion JPEG with the media server. |
| PS | .mpg.mpeg | MPEG1MPEG2 | MPEGMP3Linear PCM | - |
| TS | .ts.tp | MPEG2H.264 | AACMP3Dolby DigitalDolby Digital Plus HE-AAC | This container can be played back only with the media server. |
*3 : Some products of before the year 2004 may not be available. The compatibility with future products is not guaranteed.
Music
| Codec File extension Restrictions | ||
| MP3 .mp3 – | ||
| AAC .m4a | • Copy-protected files cannot be played back. | |
| WMA .wma | • Copy-protected files cannot be played back.• WMA Pro and WMA Lossless are not supported. | |
Note
- Some files may not be played back even if they fulfill these conditions.
- Do not use two-byte characters or other special codes for data.
- The device may become unusable with this TV if the file or folder names are changed.
DivX
DivX Certified® to play DivX® and DivX Plus™ HD (H.264/MKV) video up to 1080p HD including premium content.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO :
DivX ^® is a digital video format created by DivX, Inc. This is an official DivX Certified ^® device that plays DivX video.
Visit divx.com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX video.
Subtitle text file of DivX
Subtitles format - MicroDVD, SubRip, TMPlayer
- The DivX video file and subtitles text file are inside the same folder, and the file names are the same except for the file extensions.
- If there are more than one subtitles text files inside the same folder, they are displayed in the following order of priority: ".srt", ".sub", ".txt".
- To confirm or change the current subtitle status while playing DivX content, press the OPTION button to display Option Menu.
- Depending on the methods used to create the file or the state of recording, only parts of the subtitles may be displayed, or the subtitles may not be displayed at all.
Note
- Depending on how you make SD Card, USB Flash Memory or the media server, files and folders may not be displayed in the order you numbered.
- Depending on how you create the files and the structure of folders, the files and folders may not be displayed.
- When there are many files and folders, operation may take time to complete or some files may not be displayed or playable.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND :
This DivX Certified ^® device must be registered in order to play purchased DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) movies. To obtain your registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in the Setup Menu. Go to vod.divx.com for more information on how to complete your registration.
To show DivX VOD registration code
→ [DivX® VOD] in the Setup Menu (p. 47)
- If you want to generate the new registration code, you have to deregister the present registration code. After playing DivX VOD content once, the confirmation screen to deregister will be displayed in [DivX® VOD] in the Setup Menu. If you press the OK button on the confirmation screen, the deregistration code will be generated and you will not be able to play any contents that you purchased using the present registration code.
You will obtain the new registration code by pressing the OK button on the deregistration code screen.
- If you purchase DivX VOD content using a registration code different from this TV's code, you will not be able to play this content. ([Your device is not authorized to play this DivX protected video.] is displayed.)
Regarding DivX content that can only be played a set number of times
Some DivX VOD content can only be played a set number of times.
When you play this content, the remaining number of plays is displayed. You cannot play this content when the number of remaining plays is zero. ([This DivX rental has expired.] is displayed.)
- When playing this content, the number of remaining plays is reduced by one in the following conditions :
- If you exit the current application.
- If you play the other content.
- If you go to the next or previous content.
Devices for recording or playing back
SD Card
Use an SD Card which meets SD standards. If not, it may cause the TV to malfunction.
For playing back in Media Player
Card format : SDXC Card - exFAT SDHC Card / SD Card - FAT16 or FAT32 Compliant card type (maximum capacity) : SDXC Card (64 GB), SDHC Card (32 GB), SD Card (2 GB), miniSD Card (2 GB) (requiring miniSD adaptor)

text_image
2.1 mm 32 mm 24 mm- If miniSD Card is used, insert / remove it together with the adaptor.
- Check the latest information on the card type at the following website.
http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/tv/
For recording the digital TV programmes with this TV and playing back in Media Player
- Use the SD Card of the SD Speed Class 10 or higher in order to record and play back properly.
- It is recommended to use the Panasonic SDXC Card.
- The SD Card for recording with this TV is for the exclusive use. Do not use the SD Card with other equipment, including when you only insert it to the equipment. Otherwise, you may have to format the SD Card again with this TV. (All data will be erased when formatting.)
- The image may pause for an instant during playback of the content which is recorded continuously for a long time on the SDHC Card.
- The recording and playback may not work properly depending on the conditions of the SD Card.
■ USB Flash Memory (for playing back in Media Player)
USB Flash Memory format : FAT16, FAT32 or exFAT
- A USB HDD formatted by PC is not supported in Media Player.
■ USB HDD (for recording the digital TV programmes with this TV and playing back in Media Player) The capacity of USB HDD that have been tested for the performance with this TV : From 160 GB to 3 TB
- Connect the USB HDD to the socket outlet to record and play back properly with this TV.
- Format the USB HDD with this TV in order to use it. (p. 75)
- Regarding the performance, not all USB HDDs are guaranteed. Check the USB HDDs that have been tested for the performance with this TV at the following website.
http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/tv/
Note
• Data modified with a PC may not be displayed.
- Do not remove the device while the TV is accessing data (this can damage device or TV).
- Do not touch the pins on the device.
- Do not subject the device to a high pressure or impact.
- Insert the device in the correct direction (otherwise, device or TV may be damaged).
- Electrical interference, static electricity, or erroneous operation may damage the data or device.
- Back up the recorded data at regular intervals in case of deteriorated or damaged data or erratic operation of the TV. (Panasonic is not liable for any deterioration or damage of recorded data.)
Recording time for the USB HDD / SD Card Recording
| Recording mode | Recording device | |||||
| USB HDD | SD Card | |||||
| 1 TB 2 GB 16 GB 48 | GB 64 GB | |||||
| [DR] | For HD broadcast | 87 hours | 9 minutes | 1.5 hours | 4.5 hours | 6 hours |
| For SD broadcast | 217 hours | 24 minutes | 3.5 hours | 12 hours | 16 hours | |
| [LT1] | 290 hours | 32 minutes | 5 hours | 16 hours | 21 hours | |
| [LT2] | 580 hours | 1 hour | 10 hours | 32 hours | 43 hours | |
- These recording times are approximate for the continuous recording. Actual recording time may be different.
- The recording time of [DR] mode may change depending on the bit-rate of the broadcast.
- Depending on the broadcast (ex. when the bit-rate is low), the recording time may not increase even if in [LT1] / [LT2] mode.
- Only the selected subtitle and multi audio are recorded in [LT1] / [LT2] mode.
• Audio Description is not recorded in [LT1] / [LT2] mode. UK only
Characters table for numeric buttons
You can enter characters by using numeric buttons for free input items.

text_image
User input Name A B C D E F G H I J K L M N U V W X Y Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 a b c d e f g h i k l m n u y w x y z ( ) + - . ^ O P Q R S T 7 8 9 ! : # o p q r s t 1 2 3 4 5 6 q1 j2 in mo 7 8 9 PTS I x myx 0Press the numeric button repeatedly until you reach the desired character.
- The character is set automatically if you do not press the button for 1 second.
- You can also set the character by pressing the OK button or other numeric buttons within 1 second.
Characters table :
| Numeric buttons | The number of times to press | ||||||||||
| 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9 | 10 | 11 | |
| 1 | . | 1 | ! | : | # | + | - | * | - | ||
| 2 sex | a | b | c | 2 | A | B | C | ||||
| 3 def | d | e | f | 3 | D | E | F | ||||
| 4 yri | g | h | i | 4 | G | H | I | ||||
| 5 jki | j | k | l | 5 | J | K | L | ||||
| 6 mro | m | n | o | 6 | M | N | O | ||||
| 7 pss | p | q | r | s | 7 | P | Q | R | S | ||
| 8 tux | t | u | v | 8 | T | U | V | ||||
| 9 xzq | w | x | y | z | 9 | W | X | Y | Z | ||
| 0 | Space | 0 | |||||||||
HDMI connection
HDMI (high-definition multimedia interface) is the world's first complete digital consumer AV interface complying with a non-compression standard.
HDMI allows you to enjoy high-definition digital images and high-quality sound by connecting the TV and the equipment.
HDMI-compatible equipment*1 with an HDMI or DVI output terminal, such as a DVD player, a cable TV Box or a game equipment, can be connected to the HDMI terminal using an HDMI compliant (fully wired) cable.
For information about connections, see "External Equipment" (p. 110).
Applicable HDMI features
- Input audio signal : 2ch Linear PCM (sampling frequencies - 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz)
- Input video signal : 480i, 480p, 576i, 576p, 720p, 1080i and 1080p
→ "Input signal that can be displayed" (p. 119)
Match the output setting of the digital equipment.
- Input PC signal :
→ "Input signal that can be displayed" (p. 119)
Match the output setting of the PC.
• VIERA Link (HDAVI Control 5)
→ [VIERA Link] (p. 105)
3D
- Content Type
- Deep Colour
• x.v.Colour™
• Audio Return Channel*2 (HDMI2 terminal only)
DVI connection
If the external equipment has only a DVI output, connect to the HDMI terminal via a DVI to HDMI adaptor cable ^*3 . When the DVI to HDMI adaptor cable is used, connect the audio cable to AUDIO IN terminal with the supplied Composite adaptor.
Note
• Audio settings can be made on the [HDMI1 / 2 / 3 / 4 Input] in the Sound Menu. (p. 45)
- If the connected equipment has an aspect adjustment function, set the aspect ratio to [16:9].
• These HDMI connectors are "type A".
• These HDMI connectors are compatible with HDCP (High-Bandwidth Digital Content Protection) copyright protection.
• Equipment having no digital output terminal may be connected to the input terminal of “COMPONENT” or “VIDEO” to receive analogue signals.
•This TV incorporates HDMI™ technology.
*1 : The HDMI logo is displayed on HDMI-compliant equipment.
*2 : Audio Return Channel (ARC) is a function to be able to send digital sound signals via an HDMI cable.
*3 : Enquire at your local digital equipment retailer shop.
USB connection
- It is recommended to connect the USB HDD or USB Flash Memory directly to the TV's USB ports.
- Some USB devices or USB HUB may not be used with this TV.
- You cannot connect any devices by using USB card reader.
- You cannot use two or more same kind of USB devices simultaneously except USB Flash Memory or USB HDD.
• Additional information for USB devices may be on the following website. http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/tv/
USB Keyboard
- The USB Keyboard which requires the driver is not supported.
• To change the language type →[USB Keyboard Layout] (p. 47) - Characters may not be displayed correctly on the TV screen depending on the connected keyboard or the keyboard layout setting.
- Some of the keys of USB keyboards may correspond to the operation of the remote control.
| USB Keyboard Remote Control USB Keyboard Remote Control | |||
| ↑/↓/←/→Enter OK F3 MENU | Cursor buttons F2 VIERA TOOLS | ||
| Backspace BACK/RETURN F4 INPUT (AV) | |||
| Esc EXIT F5 / F6 Channel Down / Up | |||
| 0 - 9 / Character Numeric buttons F7 / F8 Volume Down / Up | |||
| F1 GUIDE | F9 / F10 / F11 / F12 Coloured buttons | ||
Gamepad
- Check the gamepads that have been tested for the performance with this TV at the following website. http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/tv/
- Some of the keys of gamepads correspond to the operation of the remote control.
Example :

text_image
1 2 Select Start 3 4 5 11 10 9 8 7 6| Remote Control | Remote Control | ||
| 1 | Volume Up / Down | 7 | VIERA TOOLS |
| 2 | Channel Up / Down 8 EXIT | ||
| 3 | GUIDE | 9 | INPUT (AV) |
| 4 | OK | ||
| 5 | BACK/RETURN | 10 | MENU |
| 6 | VIERA Connect | 11 | Cursor buttons |
Input signal that can be displayed
COMPONENT (Y, P_B , P_R ), HDMI
| Signal name COMPONENT HDMI | ||
| 525 (480) / 60i, 60p | ○ | ○ |
| 625 (576) / 50i, 50p | ○ | ○ |
| 750 (720) / 60p, 50p | ○ | ○ |
| 1,125 (1,080) / 60i, 50i | ○ | ○ |
| 1,125 (1,080) / 60p, 50p, 24p | ○ | |
○ Mark : Applicable input signal
PC (from HDMI terminal)
| Signal name Horizontal frequency (kHz) Vertical frequency (Hz) | |
| 640 × 480 @60 Hz 31.47 60.00 | |
| 750 (720) / 60p 45.00 60.00 | |
| 1,125 (1,080) / 60p 67.50 60.00 | |
Applicable input signal for PC is basically compatible to HDMI standard timing.
Note
- Signals other than above may not be displayed properly.
- The above signals are reformatted for optimal viewing on your display.
- PC signal is magnified or compressed for display, so that it may not be possible to show fine detail with sufficient clarity.
SCART and HDMI terminal information
AV1 SCART terminal (RGB, VIDEO, Q-Link)

text_image
Socket Earth 21 CVBS out (video) 19 CVBS earth 17 Red in 15 Red earth 13 Green in 11 Green earth 9 Blue in 7 Blue earth 5 Audio out (L) 3 Audio out (R) 1 20 CVBS in (video) 18 RGB status earth 16 Status RGB 14 Earth 12 -- 10 Q-Link data 8 Status CVBS 6 Audio in (L) 4 Audio earth 2 Audio in (R)HDMI terminal

text_image
Hot Plug Detect 19 DDC/CEC Ground 17 SCL 15 CEC 13 TMDS Clock Shield 11 TMDS Data0- 9 TMDS Data0+ 7 TMDS Data1 Shield 5 TMDS Data2- 3 TMDS Data2+ 1 18 +5V Power 16 SDA 14 Utility 12 TMDS Clock- 10 TMDS Clock+ 8 TMDS Data0 Shield 6 TMDS Data1- 4 TMDS Data1+ 2 TMDS Data2 ShieldHow to use Windows 7 as a media server
Follow the examples below to set up Windows 7 for use as a media server.
Confirm the MAC Address of VIERA in [Network Setup] (p. 93).
The following procedure and screens are examples. For more information, refer to the help functions of Windows 7.

text_image
Control Panel Adjust your computer's settings. File Edit SmallIcon * Action Color Action and Review Document Manager Address Manager Database Manager Database Server Database System Database System Database System Database System Database System Database System Database System Database System Database System Database System Database System Database System Database System Database System Database System Database System Database System Database System Database System Database System Database System Database System Database System Database System Database System Database System Database System Database System Database System Database System Database System Database System Database System Database System① Open the Windows start menu and select [Control Panel].
Select [HomeGroup] in Control Panel window.

text_image
Change homegroup settings This computer belongs to a homegroup. Share Home Group and Partners Pictures Documents Music Photos Video How do it share additional video? How do it exclude files and folders? Choose my products, music, and video in all devices on my home network. Choose media streaming options... Choose the home group. Choose resources and access your shared media. Other homegroup actions: View or print the homegroup password! Change the password... Choose the homegroup... Change advanced sharing settings... Start the HomeGroup to deliver Save changes Cancel② Be sure [Pictures], [Music] and [Videos] of "Share libraries and printers" and [Stream my pictures, music, and videos to all devices on my home network] of "Share media with devices" are checked. (Check them and click [Save changes] if necessary). Then select [Choose media streaming options...].

text_image
Choose media streaming options for computer and devices Name your media group. Choose default settings... Show device: All networks...? Allow all Remove All Options: Allow programs to the PC and media connections... Allow default settings... Add to add new or add new data when PC steps... Allow more than 100% of the PC's network. Allow more than 100% of the PC's network. Allow more than 100% of the PC's network. Allow more than 100% of the PC's network. Allow more than 100% of the PC's network. Allow more than 100% of the PC's network. Allow more than 100% of the PC's network. Allow more than 100% of the PC's network. Allow less than 100% of the PC's network. Allow more than 100% of the PC's network. Allow more than 100% of the PC's network. Allow more than 100% of the PC's network. Allow more than 100% of the PC's network. Allow more than 100% of the PC's network. Allow more than 100% of the PC's network. Allow more than less than 100% of the PC's network. Allow more than less than 100% of the PC's network. Allow more than less than 100% of the PC's network. Allow more than less than 100% of the PC's network. Allow more than less than 100% of the PC's network. Allow more than less than 100% of the PC's network. Allow more than less than 150% of the PC's network. Allow more than less than 150% of the PC's network. Allow more than less than 150% of the PC's network. Allow more than less than 150% of the PC's network. Allow more than less than 150% of the PC's network. Allow more than less than 150% of the PC's network. Allow more than less than 150% of this property window.③ In [Name your media library:] text box, enter a name that will identify your PC on VIERA.
On the Show devices drop bar, select [All networks] to display all the available devices in the list. VIERA Name stored in the [Network Link Settings] (p. 93) will be displayed.
Select the VIERA Name and click [Allowed] so that VIERA can access your PC.
Then, click [OK].
If the VIERA Name is not displayed correctly, click the device to confirm the MAC address of the device in property window. Find a device that has the same MAC address as VIERA: that is your VIERA.

text_image
Computer + Local Disk (C:) - Users > Public Organize + Include in Radio - Store with - Run - New Folder Favorites Desktop Downloads Record Files Libraries Documents Music Pictures Class Computer Network Name Public Documents Public Documents Public Music Public Pictures Public Audio Data format 24/01/2009 06:53 24/01/2009 06:43 24/01/2009 06:43 24/01/2009 06:43 24/01/2009 06:43 Public Audio Public Audio Public Audio Public Audio Public Audio Public Audio Public Audio Public Audio Public Audio Public Audio Public Audio Public Audio Public Audio Public Audio Public Audio Public Audio Public Audio Public Audio Public Audio Public Audio Public Audio Public Audio Public Audio Public Audio Public Audio Public Audio Public Audio Public Audio Public Audio Public Audio Public Audio Public Audio Public Audio Public Audio④ To share photos, music and videos with VIERA, put photo files into [Public Pictures] folder and video files into [Public Videos] folder under \Computer\Local Disk (C:\Users\Public.
FAQs
Before requesting service or assistance, please follow these simple guides to resolve the problem. If the problem still persists, please contact your local Panasonic dealer or Panasonic Customer Care Centre for assistance. For details → (p. 132)
Block noise, frozen or disappearing image occurs in digital mode / White spots or shadow image (ghosting) occurs in Analogue mode / Some channels cannot be tuned
- Check the position, direction and connection of the aerial or dish.
- Check [Signal Condition] (p. 55, 57). If [Signal Quality] is displayed in red, the digital signal is weak.
- Check your postcode area is able to receive the Freeview channels at www.freeview.co.uk
- Digital signals may be relatively low to prevent interference with analogue signals for the period of Digital Switchover. Check the schedule of Digital Switchover at www.digitaluk.co.uk
- Weather conditions will affect signal reception (heavy rain, snow, etc.), in particular in poor reception areas. Even during good weather, high pressure can cause poor reception of some channels.
- Due to the digital reception technologies involved, quality of the digital signals may be relatively low in some cases, despite good reception of analogue channels.
- Turn the TV off with the Mains power On / Off switch, and then on again.
- If problem persists, consult your local dealer.
freesat Auto Setup cannot be done completely
- Check connections and dish alignment. The dish needs to be pointing at Astra 2 at 28.2^ East, and Eurobird 1 at 28.5^ East.
- If the problem persists, consult your freesat registered retailer or call Freesat (UK) Ltd on 08450 990 990 or visit www.freesat.co.uk
Neither image nor sound is produced
• Is the TV in AV mode?
- Check the correct AV input mode is selected.
- Check the mains lead is plugged into the socket outlet.
- Has the TV been turned On?
- Check the Picture Menu (p. 42, 43) and volume.
- Check all required cables and connections are firmly in place.
Auto aspect
- Auto aspect is designed to provide you with the best ratio to fill the screen. (p. 113)
- Press the ASPECT button if you would like to change the aspect ratio manually. (p. 22)
Black and white picture
- When connecting with SCART, ensure the output setting of the external equipment is not S-Video.
Input mode, i.e. EC/AV1 remains on the screen
- Press the i button to clear this message.
Press again to redisplay.
Q-Link function does not work
- Confirm SCART cable and connection.
Also set [AV1 out] in the Setup Menu. (p. 45)
[VIERA Link] function does not work and an error message appears
- Confirm the connection. (p. 102, 103)
- Turn the connected equipment on and then switch the TV on. (p. 105)
Recording does not start immediately
- Check the settings of the recorder. For details, read the manual of the recorder.
Contrast is reduced
- Contrast is lowered in the following conditions without any user operation for a few minutes :
- no signal in DVB or AV mode
- selection of a locked channel
- selection of an invalid channel
- selection of a radio channel
- displayed menu
• digital teletext (no video contents) - thumbnail or still picture in Media Player or DLNA operations
| Problem Actions | ||
| Screen | Chaotic image, noisy | Set [P-NR] in the Picture Menu (to remove noise).→(p. 42)Check nearby electrical products (fluorescent lamp, DECT phones, mobile phones, microwave, etc.). |
| No image can be displayed | Is [Contrast], [Brightness] or [Colour] in the Picture Menu set to the minimum?→(p. 42)Please also refer to “Neither image nor sound is produced”→(p. 121) | |
| Blurry or distorted image(no sound or low volume) | Reset channels.→(p. 52, 53)Please also refer to “Neither image nor sound is produced”→(p. 121) | |
| Unusual image is displayed | Turn the TV Off with Mains power On / Off switch, then turn it On again.If the problem persists, initialise all settings→[Shipping Condition] (p. 67) | |
| Sound | No sound is produced | Is Sound Mute active?→(p. 9)Is the volume set to the minimum?Is Speaker Selection (VIERA Link) set to [TV]?Please also refer to “Neither image nor sound is produced”→(p. 121) |
| Sound level is low or sound is distorted | Sound signal reception may be deteriorated.Set [NICAM] (p. 44) in the Sound Menu to [Off]. (Analogue only)Please also refer to “Neither image nor sound is produced”→(p. 121) | |
| Unusual sound from the TV | When power is on, whirring sound of cooling fan or drive noise may be heard from inside the TV (not a sign of faulty operation). | |
| 3D | Cannot see 3D images | Has the 3D Eyewear been switched On?Ensure that [3D Mode Selection] is set to [3D].→(p. 38)Some 3D image signals may not be automatically recognised as 3D images. Set [3D Mode Selection (Manual)] to match the picture format.→(p. 38)Check that there are no obstacles between the infrared sensors on the TV and the 3D Eyewear. If the 3D Eyewear stops receiving the infrared signal for about 5 minutes, the 3D Eyewear will be turned off automatically.Check the available area to use the 3D Eyewear.→(p. 37)Depending on the person, the 3D images may be difficult to see, or cannot be seen, especially in users that have a different level of eyesight between the left and right eyes.Take the necessary steps (wearing glasses etc.) to correct your eyesight before use. |
| 3D Eyewear is turned off automatically | Check that there are no obstacles between the infrared sensors on the TV and the 3D Eyewear or that the 3D Eyewear is placed inside the coverage area (p. 37). If the 3D Eyewear stops receiving the infrared signal for about 5 minutes, the 3D Eyewear will be turned off automatically. | |
| There is something wrong with the 3D images | Check the setting of [Picture Sequence] or [Edge Smoother].→(p. 39) | |
| The indicator lamp does not light when pressing the power button on the 3D Eyewear | The battery may be running low or flat. Recharge it. | |
| The battery of 3D Eyewear does not charge, or operation time is short when charged. | Is the charging cable connected properly?Check the connection.→(p. 35)Is the TV in Standby mode?Do not turn the TV Off with Mains power On / Off switch during charging.If operation time is very short even when the battery is charged, the battery has reached the end of its lifespan. Please consult with the place of purchase. | |
| Digital Channel | No programmes shown on TV Guide | Reset channels.→(p. 52, 53)Check the digital transmission by contacting Digital UK on 08456 50 50 50 or at www.digitaluk.co.ukCheck the analogue broadcast (if still available in your area).Consult an aerial or dish engineer to check the alignment of your aerial or dish. |
| Cannot find a channel you have previously watched | The channel may broadcast for part of the day.Check the channel in the TV Guide.→(p. 23)Channel position numbers may be changed by broadcasters.Reset channels.→(p. 52, 53) | |
| HDMI | Sound is unusual | Set the sound setting of the connected equipment to "2ch L.PCM".Check the [HDMI1 / 2 / 3 / 4 Input] setting in the Sound Menu. (p. 45)If digital sound connection has a problem, select analogue sound connection. (p. 117) |
| Pictures from external equipment are unusual when the equipment is connected via HDMI | Check the HDMI cable is connected properly. (p. 110)Turn the TV and equipment Off, then turn them On again.Check an input signal from the equipment. (p. 119)Check the output resolution of the equipment.Use equipment compliant with EIA/CEA-861/861D. | |
| Network | Cannot connect to the network | Check the LAN cable is connected properly. (p. 92)Check the connections and settings. (p. 92 - 97)Check the network equipment and network environment.The router may not be set to issue IP address automatically. If the network administrator prefers to allocate an IP address, set an IP address manually. (p. 94)The router may be using MAC address filtering (security setting). Confirm the MAC Address of this TV (p. 97) and set the router to be able to use it.If the problem persists, consult your Internet Service Provider or telecommunications company. |
| Cannot select the file during DLNA operations | Is media server of the connected equipment prepared? (p. 91)Check applicable data format. (p. 114, 115) | |
| Cannot operate VIERA Connect | Check the connections and settings. (p. 92 - 97)The server or connected line might be busy now. | |
| Other | The TV does not switch On | Press and hold the standby On / Off switch on the remote control for about 1 second if Power LED is red.Check the mains lead is plugged into the socket.The fuse in the mains plug may have blown. Replace it with one of an identical rating (p. 4) |
| The TV goes into Standby mode | Auto power standby function is activated. (p. 10)The TV enters Standby mode about 30 minutes after analogue broadcast ends. | |
| The remote control does not work or is intermittent | Are the batteries installed correctly? (p. 7)Has the TV been switched On?The batteries may be running low. Replace them.Point the remote control directly at the front of the TV (within about 7 m and a 30 degree angle of the front of the TV).Situate the TV so that sunshine or other sources of bright light do not shine on the TV's remote control signal receiver. | |
| Parts of the TV become hot | Temperature rises of parts of the front, top and rear panels will not pose any problems in terms of performance or quality of the TV. | |
| Permanently lit spots on screen | Due to production process involved in this technology this may result in some pixels which are permanently lit or unlit. This is not a malfunction. | |
| Overcurrent error message appears | The connected USB device might cause this error. Remove the device and turn the TV Off with Mains power On / Off switch, then turn it On again.Check if foreign objects are inside the USB port. | |
| An error message appears | Follow the message's instructions.If the problem persists, contact your local Panasonic dealer or the authorized Service Centre. | |
On screen messages
| Message Meaning / Action | |
| All tuning data will be erased | • [Shipping Condition] will erase all tuning data ➕(p. 67) |
| Are you sure? | • Confirm correct operation. |
| Are you sure you want to delete this timer?Press OK to delete timer.Press RETURN to return. | • Confirm correct operation. |
| Bad signal | • The signal is weak. Check the aerial is plugged in properly. It may be necessary to have an aerial installer check the signal and aerial alignment.• Reset channels. ➕(p. 52, 53) |
| Child Lock is active!Press OK to enter PIN. | • The selected channel is locked in Child Lock (p. 64). You must enter the PIN number before the channel will be displayed. |
| External (USB-HDD / SD Card) Recording Due to Start | • This message will appear 2 minutes before timer programming event for external, USB HDD or SD Card recording due to start. |
| Faulty dish | • The satellite cable might be short-circuited or there might be connection problems of the cable. Check the cable and connection and then turn the TV Off with the Mains power On / Off switch, and turn it On again.• If the message still persists, it may be necessary to consult a dish installer for checking the dish and cable. |
| Feature not available. | • It is not possible to record from COMPONENT or HDMI. Connect the recorder to the TV using a fully wired SCART cable for recording from the TV tuner.• Confirm Q-Link or VIERA Link settings ➕(p. 102 - 105) |
| Feature not available.Press OK to view how it works. | • The selected feature on VIERA TOOLS is not available. Press the OK button to view the demonstration to explain how to use it. |
| Found new software version ***.Press OK to start update (may take over 40 mins) or press EXIT to ignore and you can update when TV is in standby | • There is a new software available. |
| Invalid operation - Please check settings and connections. | • Check the Q-Link or VIERA Link connection and setting ➕(p. 102 - 105) |
| Invalid system time. Please exit! | • Cannot get the time information and cannot edit Timer Programming screen. Check the connection of the RF cable. |
| Invalid system time, Timer Programming will not work.Please press TV button on remote control and check time display on Banner | • Cannot get the time information. If there is no time displayed on the Information banner, check the connection of the RF cable. |
| Max. number of timers already set! | • The maximum number of timer programming events is 15. |
| New channels found!Press OK to update channel list.Press EXIT to ignore. | • There may be new channels available.• This message will appear each time a change is made by the broadcasters. This message can be deactivated by setting [New Channel Message] to Off in [DVB Tuning Menu].Selecting OK will perform [Update Channel List]. |
| No channel found.Please check aerial or local signal availability.Press OK to start Auto Setup. | • Follow the on screen instructions.• Please also refer to p. 121.• If channels are still not found, consult your local Panasonic dealer. |
| No module inserted | Check the CI module is inserted completely.(p. 69) |
| No recording - Already recording | The equipment may already be recording. |
| No recording - Check media | The tape or disc may be “write protected”, full, missing or damaged. |
| No recording - Playing | The equipment may be playing the tape or disc. |
| No recording - Unknown reason | The recording may not be performed. Check the equipment. |
| No service | The broadcaster has stopped the service. Check the channel in the TV Guide.(p. 23) |
| No signal | The TV cannot detect the signal. Check the connection of the RF cable. |
| Overcurrent error on USB device occurred.Please remove the USB device, and switch off the TV by mains power switch. | The connected USB device might cause overcurrent error. Follow the on screen instructions.Check if foreign objects are inside the USB port. |
| PIN incorrect! | The PIN number you entered is wrong. |
| Please check settings and connections on HDMI devices. | Communication error in VIERA Link function (p. 105). |
| Please enter a frequency between 10700 and 12750 MHz. | The frequency you entered is out of range. Consult the received satellite broadcasting company. (p. 61) |
| Please check settings and connections on HDMI devices. | Communication error in VIERA Link function (p. 105). |
| Please wait. | A function is in progress. |
| Recording this channel now | The recorder is recording the programme from its own tuner. You can turn the TV off and leave the equipment recording in the normal way. |
| Reset to Factory Shipping Condition Completed.Please switch off TV. | [Auto Setup] will automatically start when Mains power On / Off switch is next turned On.(p. 13) |
| Sending Preset Data | Q-Link or VIERA Link channel download is in progress. |
| Software successfully updated.Press EXIT to continue. | The software updating is finished. |
| Software update failed.Please try again later.Press EXIT to continue. | Perform [System Update Search Now] in System Update (p. 70). If this is still unsuccessful, there may not be any new software available. |
| The device is not directly connected to the TV.The device may not work correctly. | Please do not connect the device via a USB HUB. |
| This device will be formatted and all contents deleted. Are you sure? | Once you format the USB HDD, all the recorded programme will be erased. |
| This timer will not follow the TV Guide information.Press OK to continue,RETURN to restore original timer. | UK onlyIf you edit the start time or end time of Guide link programming by more than 10 minutes, it will no longer be performed as Guide link programming. The programming will be performed according to the time setting. |
| Timer already expired ! | The starting time in Timer Programming has already passed. Set the timer correctly.(p. 63) |
| Timer incorrect ! | Set the start and end times in Timer Programming correctly.(p. 63) |
| Timer overlap.Press OK to keep,RETURN to edit. | Timer programming events are overlapped. Press the OK button to keep the overlapped setting. [Ext Rec.], [USB HDD Rec.] and [SD Card Rec.] are given priority over [Reminder]. When two or more [Ext Rec.] / [USB HDD Rec.] / [SD Card Rec.] overlap, the first timer programming event starts and finishes as programmed. The next timer programming event can then start. |
| Tuner LockedPress EXIT to unlock and stop recording | If you want to unlock the tuner, cancel Direct TV Recording (p. 104, 106), the recording of Timer Programming (p. 62) or One Touch Recording. |
| Unable to download,please check equipment | The tape or disc is active. Stop the equipment and try again. |
| 3D image not available. | You may use a function not available for 3D effect. Exit the function to view the 3D images. |
■ Media Player
| Message Meaning / Action | |
| Cannot read file | The file is broken or unreadable.Check applicable data format. ➕(p. 114, 115) |
| No Device Inserted | Confirm the SD Card or USB device is inserted correctly. |
| No valid file to play | The card has no data. |
| This operation is not possible | The selected operation is not available. |
Network
| Message Meaning / Action | |
| An internal error occurred. | Check the settings. ➕(p. 93 - 97) |
| Cannot read file | The file is broken or unreadable.Check applicable data format. ➕(p. 114, 115) |
| Communication with the server failed. | This might be a problem of the media server.Read the manual of the server software. |
| Connection to the server failed. | Check the connections and settings. ➕(p. 92 - 97) |
| Server not found | There are no available media server on your home network.Check the connections and settings. ➕(p. 92 - 97) |
| The software update is not completed. | Network download failed.Check the connections and settings. ➕(p. 92 - 97) |
| Ethernet cable not connected | Check the connection of the LAN cable. If you use a hub, also check the light on the hub is lit.The LAN cable might be defective. |
Maintenance
First, remove the mains plug from the socket outlet.
Display panel, Cabinet, Pedestal
Regular care:
Gently wipe the surface of the display panel, cabinet, or pedestal by using a soft cloth to clean the dirt or fingerprints.
For stubborn dirt:
Dampen a soft cloth with clean water or diluted neutral detergent (1 part detergent to 100 parts water). Then wring the cloth and wipe the surface. Finally, wipe away all the moisture.
Caution
- Do not use a hard cloth or rub the surface too hard. This may cause scratches on the surface.
Take care not to subject the TV's surfaces to water or detergent more than requires. A liquid inside the TV could lead to product failure.
• Take care not to subject the surfaces to insect repellent, solvent, thinner or other volatile substances. This may degrade surface quality or cause peeling of the paint. - The surface of the display panel is specially treated and may be easily damaged. Take care not to tap or scratch the surface with your fingernail or other hard objects.
- Do not allow the cabinet or pedestal to make contact with a rubber or PVC substance for a long time. This may degrade surface quality.
Mains plug
Wipe the mains plug with a dry cloth at regular intervals. Moisture and dust may lead to fire or electrical shock.
Glossary
DLNA
Digital Living Network Alliance
DVI
Digital Visual Interface - A high quality video interface standard to connect to the display
ETHERNET
One of the popular standards of LAN
EPG
Electronic Programme Guide - A digital guide showing scheduled programmes
Frame Sequential
The 3D format that the separated images for the left and right eyes are recorded with the high definition quality and alternately played back at the high speed
HDMI
High-Definition Multimedia Interface - A digital audio and video interface for transmitting uncompressed digital signals on a single cable
LAN
Local Area Network
MAC Address
Media Access control Address
NICAM
Near Instantaneous Companded Audio Multiplex - A format for digital sound over television
NTSC
National Television System Committee - One of the television signals used in USA, etc.
RF
Radio Frequency - Signal received from terrestrial aerial
RGB / Video
Choose between these three video formats depending on personal preference and equipment requirement (RGB - Red, Green and Blue)
SCART
21 pin connection used for video, audio and switching signals (Also known as Euro SCART and Peritel)
Shop viewing environment
Shop viewing environment is the demonstration mode to explain main features of this TV in an easy understandable way. This mode will work if you select [Shop] in “Auto Setup” (p. 16).
Side by Side
One of the types of 3D format available for broadcasts
SPDIF
A standard audio transfer file format
Top and Bottom
One of the types of 3D format available for broadcasts
USB
Universal Serial Bus - An interface specification to connect devices
VCR
Video Cassette Recorder
24p
Progressive images recorded at a rate of 24 frames per second (film source)
Index
A Accessories 6
Advanced Settings 43,72,73
Analogue Tuning Menu 53, 58, 59
Aspect 22,
Astra 11, 60, 121
Audio Description ……21, 45
Auto Gain Control 44
Auto Setup ……13, 52, 53
Auto Standby
AV1 out……45, 104
B Banner Display Timeout ....47
C Cable TV box ……12, 110
Category list 25 C.A.T.S. 42
Channel List ....55, 58, 59, 61
Channel Sorting by Region … 56
Child Lock 64
Clamper 11
Common Interface 69
COMPONENT 112,
Connection ……11, 12, 74, 92, 102, 103, 110 - 112
Direct TV Recording 104,
DivX 115
DLNA 91
DTS 89
DVB Tuning Menu ...... 53, 56 - 58
DVD Recorder 11, 12, 32, 102, 110
DVI 117
DVI Input Setting 43
E EPG 23
Eurobird 1 60
External equipment 11, 12, 31, 110 - 112
External input ……31, 32
F FAQs 121 - 123
Favourites Edit ……54, 57, 61
Frame Sequential 33;38
Free input menu ……41, 117
freesat Tuning Menu .. 52, 54, 55
G Glossary 127
Guide link programming …27
H HDMI 117, 119, 131
HDMI Content Detection …45
Hold 21, 29
Home Cinema 109
Hotbird 60
113 Information banner……20
Input Labels 66
Input signal 119
Intelligent Frame Creation…43
Last view 20
45 Mains Lead 11
Mains power On / Off switch… 10, 13
Maintenance 127
…25 Manual Tuning ……56, 59, 61
Media Player 79 - 90
Menu Functions …… 41 - 51
Monaural Audio 21
Multi Audio 21
Music mode 89
^1 N Network connections ……92
Network Setup 93 - 97
119 New Channel Message ……57
NICAM 44
NTSC 42, 113
Off Timer 21,45
One Touch ^106 Recording
Optional accessories 6
Other Sat. (Satellite)
Tuning Menu 60
Öwner ID 15,68
P PAL 113
Pixel Orbiter 43
Pedestal 7
Photo mode 80
PIN number ……15, 65, 68, 73
Playing Time Display ....
P-NR 42
Power and Timer LED 10, 26, 62, 77
Q Link 102, 104
Q-Link Download ……13, 46
Quick Start Guide …… 6 - 17
R Radio Mode 47
Remote control ……6, 7, 9
Reset to Defaults ……43, 45
Reversal Film Effect ……42
Rewind LIVE TV 78
RGB 131
S Safely remove USB ……21
Sales and Support
Information 132
SCART 119, 131
SD Card 74, 79, 116
Search list 24, 25
Shipping Condition 67
Side by Side ……33, 38
Signal Condition ……55, 57
Slideshow 81, 99
Software Update ……70, 97
Specifications ……130, 131
Split Programme 27
Subtitles 22, 30
System Update 70
T Teletext 28 - 30
THX 42
Timer Programming …26, 62
Top and Bottom ……33, 38
True Cinema 42
TV Guide 23 - 27
TV Guide Settings 45
U Update Channel List ……58
USB Charge in Standby ……
35, 47
USB Flash Memory …79, 116
70SB HDD 74,116
USB connection 118
V Audio ProSurround ……44
VCR 11, 12, 32, 110
Video mode 85
VIERA Connect ……18, 101
VIERA Link
102, 103, 105 - 109
VIERA TOOLS 40
Viewing Mode……42
47Vivid Colour 42
Volume Correction ……21, 44
W Wireless LAN Adaptor
6, 12, 14, 15, 17, 92
WSS 113
Zoom 22,83
24p Smooth Film 43
3D Eyewear 6, 33 - 36
3D Refresh Rate 43
3D Settings 39
Licence
Even if no special notation has been made of company or product trademarks, these trademarks have been fully respected.
- “freesat” is a registered trademark and the “freesat” logo is a trademark of Freesat (UK) Ltd.
• DVB and the DVB logos are trademarks of the DVB Project.
• SDXC Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC. - HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries.
- HDAVI Control™ is a trademark of Panasonic Corporation.
- "AVCHD" and the "AVCHD" logo are trademarks of Panasonic Corporation and Sony Corporation.
• x.v.Colour™ is a trademark. - THX and the THX logo are trademarks of THX Ltd. which may be registered in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved.
• Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
• Manufactured under license from Real Sound Lab, SIA.
CONEQ is a trademark of Real Sound Lab, SIA.
- Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #'s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS and the Symbol are registered trademarks, & DTS 2.0+ Digital Out and the DTS logos are trademarks of DTS, Inc. Product includes software. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
• VIERA Connect is a trademark of Panasonic Corporation. - DLNA®, the DLNA Logo and DLNA CERTIFIED™ are trademarks, service marks, or certification marks of the Digital Living Network Alliance.
• Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries. - DivX ^ , DivX Certified ^ , DivX Plus ^TM HD and associated logos are trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are used under license.
- The Skype name, associated trade marks and logos and the "S" symbol are trade marks of Skype Limited.
- "RealD 3D" is a trademark of RealD. This product is covered by U.S. Patent 5,193,000 until 28 August, 2011.
- QuickTime and the QuickTime logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Apple Inc., used under license therefrom.
• GUIDE Plus+ is (1) a registered trademark or trademark of, (2) manufactured under license from and (3) subject of various international patents and patent applications owned by, or licensed to, Rovi Corporation and/or its related affiliates.








Specifications
| TV | VT30B | |||
| Power Source | AC 220-240 V, 50 / 60 Hz | |||
| Rated Power Consumption | 430 W 500 W | |||
| Standby Power Consumption | 0.30 W30.00 W (With monitor out recording) | |||
| Dimensions(W × H × D) | 1,329 mm × 847 mm × 387 mm(With Pedestal)1,329 mm × 810 mm × 55 mm (TV only) | 1,570 mm × 994 mm × 400 mm(With Pedestal)1,570 mm × 956 mm × 60 mm (TV only) | ||
| Mass | 44.5 kg Net (With Pedestal) 63.0 k Net (With Pedestal)38.5 kg Net (TV only) 56.0 k Net (TV only) g | |||
| Display panel | Aspect Ratio | 16:9 | ||
| Visible screen size | 140 cm (diagonal)1,221 mm (W) × 686 mm (H) | 165 cm (diagonal)1,434 mm (W) × 806 mm (H) | ||
| Number of pixels | 2,073,600 (1,920 (W) × 1,080 (H)) [5,760 × 1,080 dots] | |||
| Sound | Speaker | Front speaker (180 mm × 25 mm) × 2, Woofer (Φ 80 mm) × 1 | ||
| Audio Output | 22 W (6 W + 6 W + 10 W) | |||
| Headphones | M3 (3.5 mm) stereo mini Jack × 1 | |||
| Satellite dish input | Female F-type 75 Ω | |||
| Aerial input | UK UHF Ireland VHF / UHF | |||
| Receiving Systems / Band name | UK | DVB-S / S2 freesat services via Satellite dish input.freesat frequency range - 950 MHz to 2,150 MHzLNB Power and Polarisation - Vertical: +13 VHorizontal: +18 VCurrent: Max. 500 mA(overload protection)22 kHz Tone - Frequency: 22 kHz ± 2 kHzAmplitude: 0.6 V ± 0.2 VSymbol Rate - Max. 30 MS/sFEC Mode - 1/2, 3/5, 2/3, 3/4, 4/5, 5/6, 8/9, 9/10Demodulation - QPSK, 8PSKNot available for DiSEqC control.DVB-T / T2 Digital terrestrial services.PAL I UHF E21-68PAL 525/60 Playback of NTSC tape from some PAL Video recorders(VCR) or NTSC disc playback from DVD player and recorder.M.NTSC Playback from M.NTSC Video recorders (VCR).NTSC (AV input only) Playback from NTSC Video recorders (VCR). | ||
| Ireland | DVB-S / S2 Receiver frequency range - 950 MHz to 2,150 MHzLNB Power and Polarisation - Vertical: +13 VHorizontal: +18 VCurrent: Max. 500 mA(overload protection)22 kHz Tone - Frequency: 22 kHz ± 2 kHzAmplitude: 0.6 V ± 0.2 VSymbol Rate - Max. 30 MS/sFEC Mode - 1/2, 3/-5, 2/3, 3/4, 4/5, 5/6, 8/9, 9/10Demodulation - QPSK, 8PSKNot available for DiSEqC control.DVB-T Digital terrestrial services.PAL IVHF A-J UHF E21 - E69CATV S1 - S20 CATV S21 - S41 (Hyperband)PAL 525/60 Playback of NTSC tape from some PAL Video recorders (VCR)or NTSC disc playback from DVD player and recorder.M.NTSC Playback from M.NTSC Video recorders (VCR).NTSC (AV input only) Playback from NTSC Video recorders (VCR). | |||
| Operating Conditions | Temperature : 0 °C - 35 °CHumidity : 20 % - 80 % RH (non-condensing) | |||
| Connection Terminals | AV1 (SCART) | 21 Pin terminal (Audio/Video in, Audio/Video out, RGB in, Q-Link) | ||
| AV2 input | VIDEO RCA PIN Type × 1 1.0 V[p-p] (75 Ω) | |||
| AUDIO L - R RCA PIN Type × 2 0.5 V[rms] | ||||
| COMPONENT input | Y 1.0 V[p-p] (including synchronization) P_B , P_R ±0.35 V[p-p] | |||
| HDMI 1 / 2 / 3 / 4 input | TYPE A ConnectorsHDMI1 / 3 / 4 : 3D, Content Type, Deep Colour, x.v.ColourTMHDMI2 : 3D, Content Type, Audio Return Channel, Deep Colour,x.v.ColourTMThis TV supports “HDAVI Control 5” function. | |||
| Card slot | SD Card slot × 1Common Interface slot × 1 | |||
| ETHERNET | RJ45, IEEE802.3 10BASE-T / 100BASE-TX | |||
| USB 1 / 2 / 3 | USB2.0 DC 5 V, Max. 500 mA | |||
| AUDIO OUT | RCA PIN Type × 2 0.5 V[rms] (high impedance) | |||
| DIGITAL AUDIO OUT | PCM / Dolby Digital / DTS, Fiber optic | |||
3D Eyewear
| Dimensions (W × H × D) | 170.1 mm × 41.2 mm × 169.8 mm (Without nose pad) |
| Mass | 39 g Net |
| Lens type | Liquid Crystal Shutter |
| Usage temperature range | 0 °C - 40 °C |
| Charging power supply | DC 5 V (supplied by USB port of the TV) |
| Battery* | Lithium-ion polymer rechargeable batteryDC 3.7 V, 70 mAhOperation time : Approx. 30 hours Charging time : Approx. 2 hoursNumber of charging cycles : Approx. 500 (charging the fully depleted battery) |
| Materials | Main body : Resin Lens section : Liquid crystal glass |
* The battery deteriorates after repeated use, and the operation time eventually becomes short.
Number of charging cycles may decrease depending on the operating conditions.
During the long period of disuse, charge fully once every 6 months to keep the performance.
The figures above are at shipping from the factory, and are not a guarantee of performance.
Wireless LAN Adaptor
| Power supply | DC 5V (USB powered) 500 mA |
| Dimensions (W × H × D) | 30.00 mm × 10.72 mm × 94.85 mm |
| Mass | 25g Net |
| Antenna | Tx 1, Rx 2 |
| Interface | USB 2.0 |
| Standard Compliance | IEEE802.11n / IEEE802.11a / IEEE802.11g / IEEE802.11b |
| Transmission system | MISO-OFDM system, OFDM system, DSSS system |
| Frequency Range | IEEE802.11n / IEEE802.11a : 5.150GHz - 5.725 GHzIEEE802.11g / IEEE802.11b / IEEE802.11n : 2.412 GHz - 2.472 GHz |
| Transfer rate (standard)* | IEEE802.11n : Tx Max. 150Mbps, Rx Max. 300MbpsIEEE802.11g / IEEE802.11a : Max. 54MbpsIEEE802.11b : Max. 11Mbps |
| Access Mode | Infrastructure mode |
| Security | WPA2-PSK (TKIP/AES) WPA-PSK (TKIP/AES) WEP (64bit/128bit) |
* Transfer rates are theoretical values; however, actual communication rate will vary according to communication environment or connected equipment.
Note
- Design and Specifications are subject to change without notice. Mass and Dimensions shown are approximate.
- This equipment complies with the EMC standards listed below.
EN55013, EN61000-3-2, EN61000-3-3, EN55020, EN55022, EN55024
Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment and used Batteries

These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean that used electrical and electronic products and batteries should not be mixed with general household waste. For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries, please take them to applicable collection points, in accordance with your national legislation and the Directives 2002/96/EC and 2006/66/EC.

By disposing of these products and batteries correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling.
For more information about collection and recycling of old products and batteries, please contact your local municipality, your waste disposal service or the point of sale where you purchased the items. Penalties may be applicable for incorrect disposal of this waste, in accordance with national legislation.
For business users in the European Union
If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer or supplier for further information.

[Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union]
These symbols are only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these items, please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal.
Note for the battery symbol (bottom two symbol examples):
This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol. In this case it complies with the requirement set by the Directive for the chemical involved.
Sales and Support Information
Customer Care Centre
• For customers within the UK: 0844 844 3852
• For customers within Ireland: 01 289 8333
- Visit our website for product information: www.panasonic.co.uk
• E-mail: customer.care@panasonic.co.uk
Direct Sales at Panasonic UK
• For customers: 0844 844 3856
- Order accessory and consumable items for your product with ease and confidence by phoning our Customer Care Centre Monday – Thursday 9:00am – 5:30pm, Friday 9:30am – 5:30pm (Excluding public holidays).
- Or go on line through our Internet Accessory ordering application at www.pas-europe.com.
- Most major credit and debit cards accepted.
- All enquiries transactions and distribution facilities are provided directly by Panasonic UK.
- It couldn't be simpler!
- Also available through our Internet is direct shopping for a wide range of finished products, take a browse on our website for further details.
Freesat
- For more information and support about Freesat, visit www.freesat.co.uk

Declaration of Conformity (DoC)
Authorized Representative :
Panasonic Testing Centre
Panasonic Marketing Europe GmbH
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Germany
Customer's Record
The model number and serial number of this product may be found on its rear panel. You should note this serial number in the space provided below and retain this book, plus your purchase receipt, as a permanent record of your purchase to aid in identification in the event of theft or loss, and for Warranty Service purposes.
Model Number Serial Number
Panasonic UK, a branch of Panasonic Marketing Europe GmbH
M0411-0
Willoughby Road, Bracknell, Berkshire, RG12 8FP
Web Site : http://panasonic.net










Normal 3D*1




Normal 3D*1



Normal 3D*1




Normal 3D*1




Normal 3D
